5 collectd.conf - Configuration for the system statistics collection daemon B<collectd>
9 BaseDir "/var/lib/collectd"
10 PIDFile "/run/collectd.pid"
31 This config file controls how the system statistics collection daemon
32 B<collectd> behaves. The most significant option is B<LoadPlugin>, which
33 controls which plugins to load. These plugins ultimately define collectd's
34 behavior. If the B<AutoLoadPlugin> option has been enabled, the explicit
35 B<LoadPlugin> lines may be omitted for all plugins with a configuration block,
36 i.e. a C<E<lt>PluginE<nbsp>...E<gt>> block.
38 The syntax of this config file is similar to the config file of the famous
39 I<Apache> webserver. Each line contains either an option (a key and a list of
40 one or more values) or a section-start or -end. Empty lines and everything
41 after a non-quoted hash-symbol (C<#>) are ignored. I<Keys> are unquoted
42 strings, consisting only of alphanumeric characters and the underscore (C<_>)
43 character. Keys are handled case insensitive by I<collectd> itself and all
44 plugins included with it. I<Values> can either be an I<unquoted string>, a
45 I<quoted string> (enclosed in double-quotes) a I<number> or a I<boolean>
46 expression. I<Unquoted strings> consist of only alphanumeric characters and
47 underscores (C<_>) and do not need to be quoted. I<Quoted strings> are
48 enclosed in double quotes (C<">). You can use the backslash character (C<\>)
49 to include double quotes as part of the string. I<Numbers> can be specified in
50 decimal and floating point format (using a dot C<.> as decimal separator),
51 hexadecimal when using the C<0x> prefix and octal with a leading zero (C<0>).
52 I<Boolean> values are either B<true> or B<false>.
54 Lines may be wrapped by using C<\> as the last character before the newline.
55 This allows long lines to be split into multiple lines. Quoted strings may be
56 wrapped as well. However, those are treated special in that whitespace at the
57 beginning of the following lines will be ignored, which allows for nicely
58 indenting the wrapped lines.
60 The configuration is read and processed in order, i.e. from top to bottom. So
61 the plugins are loaded in the order listed in this config file. It is a good
62 idea to load any logging plugins first in order to catch messages from plugins
63 during configuration. Also, unless B<AutoLoadPlugin> is enabled, the
64 B<LoadPlugin> option I<must> occur I<before> the appropriate
65 C<E<lt>B<Plugin> ...E<gt>> block.
71 =item B<BaseDir> I<Directory>
73 Sets the base directory. This is the directory beneath which all RRD-files are
74 created. Possibly more subdirectories are created. This is also the working
75 directory for the daemon.
77 =item B<LoadPlugin> I<Plugin>
79 Loads the plugin I<Plugin>. This is required to load plugins, unless the
80 B<AutoLoadPlugin> option is enabled (see below). Without any loaded plugins,
81 I<collectd> will be mostly useless.
83 Only the first B<LoadPlugin> statement or block for a given plugin name has any
84 effect. This is useful when you want to split up the configuration into smaller
85 files and want each file to be "self contained", i.e. it contains a B<Plugin>
86 block I<and> the appropriate B<LoadPlugin> statement. The downside is that if
87 you have multiple conflicting B<LoadPlugin> blocks, e.g. when they specify
88 different intervals, only one of them (the first one encountered) will take
89 effect and all others will be silently ignored.
91 B<LoadPlugin> may either be a simple configuration I<statement> or a I<block>
92 with additional options, affecting the behavior of B<LoadPlugin>. A simple
93 statement looks like this:
97 Options inside a B<LoadPlugin> block can override default settings and
98 influence the way plugins are loaded, e.g.:
104 The following options are valid inside B<LoadPlugin> blocks:
108 =item B<Globals> B<true|false>
110 If enabled, collectd will export all global symbols of the plugin (and of all
111 libraries loaded as dependencies of the plugin) and, thus, makes those symbols
112 available for resolving unresolved symbols in subsequently loaded plugins if
113 that is supported by your system.
115 This is useful (or possibly even required), e.g., when loading a plugin that
116 embeds some scripting language into the daemon (e.g. the I<Perl> and
117 I<Python plugins>). Scripting languages usually provide means to load
118 extensions written in C. Those extensions require symbols provided by the
119 interpreter, which is loaded as a dependency of the respective collectd plugin.
120 See the documentation of those plugins (e.g., L<collectd-perl(5)> or
121 L<collectd-python(5)>) for details.
123 By default, this is disabled. As a special exception, if the plugin name is
124 either C<perl> or C<python>, the default is changed to enabled in order to keep
125 the average user from ever having to deal with this low level linking stuff.
127 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
129 Sets a plugin-specific interval for collecting metrics. This overrides the
130 global B<Interval> setting. If a plugin provides its own support for specifying
131 an interval, that setting will take precedence.
133 =item B<FlushInterval> I<Seconds>
135 Specifies the interval, in seconds, to call the flush callback if it's
136 defined in this plugin. By default, this is disabled.
138 =item B<FlushTimeout> I<Seconds>
140 Specifies the value of the timeout argument of the flush callback.
144 =item B<AutoLoadPlugin> B<false>|B<true>
146 When set to B<false> (the default), each plugin needs to be loaded explicitly,
147 using the B<LoadPlugin> statement documented above. If a
148 B<E<lt>PluginE<nbsp>...E<gt>> block is encountered and no configuration
149 handling callback for this plugin has been registered, a warning is logged and
150 the block is ignored.
152 When set to B<true>, explicit B<LoadPlugin> statements are not required. Each
153 B<E<lt>PluginE<nbsp>...E<gt>> block acts as if it was immediately preceded by a
154 B<LoadPlugin> statement. B<LoadPlugin> statements are still required for
155 plugins that don't provide any configuration, e.g. the I<Load plugin>.
157 =item B<CollectInternalStats> B<false>|B<true>
159 When set to B<true>, various statistics about the I<collectd> daemon will be
160 collected, with "collectd" as the I<plugin name>. Defaults to B<false>.
162 The following metrics are reported:
166 =item C<collectd-write_queue/queue_length>
168 The number of metrics currently in the write queue. You can limit the queue
169 length with the B<WriteQueueLimitLow> and B<WriteQueueLimitHigh> options.
171 =item C<collectd-write_queue/derive-dropped>
173 The number of metrics dropped due to a queue length limitation.
174 If this value is non-zero, your system can't handle all incoming metrics and
175 protects itself against overload by dropping metrics.
177 =item C<collectd-cache/cache_size>
179 The number of elements in the metric cache (the cache you can interact with
180 using L<collectd-unixsock(5)>).
184 =item B<Include> I<Path> [I<pattern>]
186 If I<Path> points to a file, includes that file. If I<Path> points to a
187 directory, recursively includes all files within that directory and its
188 subdirectories. If the C<wordexp> function is available on your system,
189 shell-like wildcards are expanded before files are included. This means you can
190 use statements like the following:
192 Include "/etc/collectd.d/*.conf"
194 Starting with version 5.3, this may also be a block in which further options
195 affecting the behavior of B<Include> may be specified. The following option is
198 <Include "/etc/collectd.d">
204 =item B<Filter> I<pattern>
206 If the C<fnmatch> function is available on your system, a shell-like wildcard
207 I<pattern> may be specified to filter which files to include. This may be used
208 in combination with recursively including a directory to easily be able to
209 arbitrarily mix configuration files and other documents (e.g. README files).
210 The given example is similar to the first example above but includes all files
211 matching C<*.conf> in any subdirectory of C</etc/collectd.d>.
215 If more than one file is included by a single B<Include> option, the files
216 will be included in lexicographical order (as defined by the C<strcmp>
217 function). Thus, you can e.E<nbsp>g. use numbered prefixes to specify the
218 order in which the files are loaded.
220 To prevent loops and shooting yourself in the foot in interesting ways the
221 nesting is limited to a depth of 8E<nbsp>levels, which should be sufficient for
222 most uses. Since symlinks are followed it is still possible to crash the daemon
223 by looping symlinks. In our opinion significant stupidity should result in an
224 appropriate amount of pain.
226 It is no problem to have a block like C<E<lt>Plugin fooE<gt>> in more than one
227 file, but you cannot include files from within blocks.
229 =item B<PIDFile> I<File>
231 Sets where to write the PID file to. This file is overwritten when it exists
232 and deleted when the program is stopped. Some init-scripts might override this
233 setting using the B<-P> command-line option.
235 =item B<PluginDir> I<Directory>
237 Path to the plugins (shared objects) of collectd.
239 =item B<TypesDB> I<File> [I<File> ...]
241 Set one or more files that contain the data-set descriptions. See
242 L<types.db(5)> for a description of the format of this file.
244 If this option is not specified, a default file is read. If you need to define
245 custom types in addition to the types defined in the default file, you need to
246 explicitly load both. In other words, if the B<TypesDB> option is encountered
247 the default behavior is disabled and if you need the default types you have to
248 also explicitly load them.
250 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
252 Configures the interval in which to query the read plugins. Obviously smaller
253 values lead to a higher system load produced by collectd, while higher values
254 lead to more coarse statistics.
256 B<Warning:> You should set this once and then never touch it again. If you do,
257 I<you will have to delete all your RRD files> or know some serious RRDtool
258 magic! (Assuming you're using the I<RRDtool> or I<RRDCacheD> plugin.)
260 =item B<MaxReadInterval> I<Seconds>
262 A read plugin doubles the interval between queries after each failed attempt
265 This options limits the maximum value of the interval. The default value is
268 =item B<Timeout> I<Iterations>
270 Consider a value list "missing" when no update has been read or received for
271 I<Iterations> iterations. By default, I<collectd> considers a value list
272 missing when no update has been received for twice the update interval. Since
273 this setting uses iterations, the maximum allowed time without update depends
274 on the I<Interval> information contained in each value list. This is used in
275 the I<Threshold> configuration to dispatch notifications about missing values,
276 see L<collectd-threshold(5)> for details.
278 =item B<ReadThreads> I<Num>
280 Number of threads to start for reading plugins. The default value is B<5>, but
281 you may want to increase this if you have more than five plugins that take a
282 long time to read. Mostly those are plugins that do network-IO. Setting this to
283 a value higher than the number of registered read callbacks is not recommended.
285 =item B<WriteThreads> I<Num>
287 Number of threads to start for dispatching value lists to write plugins. The
288 default value is B<5>, but you may want to increase this if you have more than
289 five plugins that may take relatively long to write to.
291 =item B<WriteQueueLimitHigh> I<HighNum>
293 =item B<WriteQueueLimitLow> I<LowNum>
295 Metrics are read by the I<read threads> and then put into a queue to be handled
296 by the I<write threads>. If one of the I<write plugins> is slow (e.g. network
297 timeouts, I/O saturation of the disk) this queue will grow. In order to avoid
298 running into memory issues in such a case, you can limit the size of this
301 By default, there is no limit and memory may grow indefinitely. This is most
302 likely not an issue for clients, i.e. instances that only handle the local
303 metrics. For servers it is recommended to set this to a non-zero value, though.
305 You can set the limits using B<WriteQueueLimitHigh> and B<WriteQueueLimitLow>.
306 Each of them takes a numerical argument which is the number of metrics in the
307 queue. If there are I<HighNum> metrics in the queue, any new metrics I<will> be
308 dropped. If there are less than I<LowNum> metrics in the queue, all new metrics
309 I<will> be enqueued. If the number of metrics currently in the queue is between
310 I<LowNum> and I<HighNum>, the metric is dropped with a probability that is
311 proportional to the number of metrics in the queue (i.e. it increases linearly
312 until it reaches 100%.)
314 If B<WriteQueueLimitHigh> is set to non-zero and B<WriteQueueLimitLow> is
315 unset, the latter will default to half of B<WriteQueueLimitHigh>.
317 If you do not want to randomly drop values when the queue size is between
318 I<LowNum> and I<HighNum>, set B<WriteQueueLimitHigh> and B<WriteQueueLimitLow>
321 Enabling the B<CollectInternalStats> option is of great help to figure out the
322 values to set B<WriteQueueLimitHigh> and B<WriteQueueLimitLow> to.
324 =item B<Hostname> I<Name>
326 Sets the hostname that identifies a host. If you omit this setting, the
327 hostname will be determined using the L<gethostname(2)> system call.
329 =item B<FQDNLookup> B<true|false>
331 If B<Hostname> is determined automatically this setting controls whether or not
332 the daemon should try to figure out the "fully qualified domain name", FQDN.
333 This is done using a lookup of the name returned by C<gethostname>. This option
334 is enabled by default.
336 =item B<PreCacheChain> I<ChainName>
338 =item B<PostCacheChain> I<ChainName>
340 Configure the name of the "pre-cache chain" and the "post-cache chain". Please
341 see L<FILTER CONFIGURATION> below on information on chains and how these
342 setting change the daemon's behavior.
346 =head1 PLUGIN OPTIONS
348 Some plugins may register own options. These options must be enclosed in a
349 C<Plugin>-Section. Which options exist depends on the plugin used. Some plugins
350 require external configuration, too. The C<apache plugin>, for example,
351 required C<mod_status> to be configured in the webserver you're going to
352 collect data from. These plugins are listed below as well, even if they don't
353 require any configuration within collectd's configuration file.
355 A list of all plugins and a short summary for each plugin can be found in the
356 F<README> file shipped with the sourcecode and hopefully binary packets as
359 =head2 Plugin C<aggregation>
361 The I<Aggregation plugin> makes it possible to aggregate several values into
362 one using aggregation functions such as I<sum>, I<average>, I<min> and I<max>.
363 This can be put to a wide variety of uses, e.g. average and total CPU
364 statistics for your entire fleet.
366 The grouping is powerful but, as with many powerful tools, may be a bit
367 difficult to wrap your head around. The grouping will therefore be
368 demonstrated using an example: The average and sum of the CPU usage across
369 all CPUs of each host is to be calculated.
371 To select all the affected values for our example, set C<Plugin cpu> and
372 C<Type cpu>. The other values are left unspecified, meaning "all values". The
373 I<Host>, I<Plugin>, I<PluginInstance>, I<Type> and I<TypeInstance> options
374 work as if they were specified in the C<WHERE> clause of an C<SELECT> SQL
380 Although the I<Host>, I<PluginInstance> (CPU number, i.e. 0, 1, 2, ...) and
381 I<TypeInstance> (idle, user, system, ...) fields are left unspecified in the
382 example, the intention is to have a new value for each host / type instance
383 pair. This is achieved by "grouping" the values using the C<GroupBy> option.
384 It can be specified multiple times to group by more than one field.
387 GroupBy "TypeInstance"
389 We do neither specify nor group by I<plugin instance> (the CPU number), so all
390 metrics that differ in the CPU number only will be aggregated. Each
391 aggregation needs I<at least one> such field, otherwise no aggregation would
394 The full example configuration looks like this:
396 <Plugin "aggregation">
402 GroupBy "TypeInstance"
405 CalculateAverage true
409 There are a couple of limitations you should be aware of:
415 The I<Type> cannot be left unspecified, because it is not reasonable to add
416 apples to oranges. Also, the internal lookup structure won't work if you try
421 There must be at least one unspecified, ungrouped field. Otherwise nothing
426 As you can see in the example above, each aggregation has its own
427 B<Aggregation> block. You can have multiple aggregation blocks and aggregation
428 blocks may match the same values, i.e. one value list can update multiple
429 aggregations. The following options are valid inside B<Aggregation> blocks:
433 =item B<Host> I<Host>
435 =item B<Plugin> I<Plugin>
437 =item B<PluginInstance> I<PluginInstance>
439 =item B<Type> I<Type>
441 =item B<TypeInstance> I<TypeInstance>
443 Selects the value lists to be added to this aggregation. B<Type> must be a
444 valid data set name, see L<types.db(5)> for details.
446 If the string starts with and ends with a slash (C</>), the string is
447 interpreted as a I<regular expression>. The regex flavor used are POSIX
448 extended regular expressions as described in L<regex(7)>. Example usage:
450 Host "/^db[0-9]\\.example\\.com$/"
452 =item B<GroupBy> B<Host>|B<Plugin>|B<PluginInstance>|B<TypeInstance>
454 Group valued by the specified field. The B<GroupBy> option may be repeated to
455 group by multiple fields.
457 =item B<SetHost> I<Host>
459 =item B<SetPlugin> I<Plugin>
461 =item B<SetPluginInstance> I<PluginInstance>
463 =item B<SetTypeInstance> I<TypeInstance>
465 Sets the appropriate part of the identifier to the provided string.
467 The I<PluginInstance> should include the placeholder C<%{aggregation}> which
468 will be replaced with the aggregation function, e.g. "average". Not including
469 the placeholder will result in duplication warnings and/or messed up values if
470 more than one aggregation function are enabled.
472 The following example calculates the average usage of all "even" CPUs:
474 <Plugin "aggregation">
477 PluginInstance "/[0,2,4,6,8]$/"
481 SetPluginInstance "even-%{aggregation}"
484 GroupBy "TypeInstance"
486 CalculateAverage true
490 This will create the files:
496 foo.example.com/cpu-even-average/cpu-idle
500 foo.example.com/cpu-even-average/cpu-system
504 foo.example.com/cpu-even-average/cpu-user
512 =item B<CalculateNum> B<true>|B<false>
514 =item B<CalculateSum> B<true>|B<false>
516 =item B<CalculateAverage> B<true>|B<false>
518 =item B<CalculateMinimum> B<true>|B<false>
520 =item B<CalculateMaximum> B<true>|B<false>
522 =item B<CalculateStddev> B<true>|B<false>
524 Boolean options for enabling calculation of the number of value lists, their
525 sum, average, minimum, maximum andE<nbsp>/ or standard deviation. All options
526 are disabled by default.
530 =head2 Plugin C<amqp>
532 The I<AMQP plugin> can be used to communicate with other instances of
533 I<collectd> or third party applications using an AMQP message broker. Values
534 are sent to or received from the broker, which handles routing, queueing and
535 possibly filtering out messages.
540 # Send values to an AMQP broker
541 <Publish "some_name">
547 Exchange "amq.fanout"
548 # ExchangeType "fanout"
549 # RoutingKey "collectd"
551 # ConnectionRetryDelay 0
554 # GraphitePrefix "collectd."
555 # GraphiteEscapeChar "_"
556 # GraphiteSeparateInstances false
557 # GraphiteAlwaysAppendDS false
558 # GraphitePreserveSeparator false
561 # Receive values from an AMQP broker
562 <Subscribe "some_name">
568 Exchange "amq.fanout"
569 # ExchangeType "fanout"
572 # QueueAutoDelete true
573 # RoutingKey "collectd.#"
574 # ConnectionRetryDelay 0
578 The plugin's configuration consists of a number of I<Publish> and I<Subscribe>
579 blocks, which configure sending and receiving of values respectively. The two
580 blocks are very similar, so unless otherwise noted, an option can be used in
581 either block. The name given in the blocks starting tag is only used for
582 reporting messages, but may be used to support I<flushing> of certain
583 I<Publish> blocks in the future.
587 =item B<Host> I<Host>
589 Hostname or IP-address of the AMQP broker. Defaults to the default behavior of
590 the underlying communications library, I<rabbitmq-c>, which is "localhost".
592 =item B<Port> I<Port>
594 Service name or port number on which the AMQP broker accepts connections. This
595 argument must be a string, even if the numeric form is used. Defaults to
598 =item B<VHost> I<VHost>
600 Name of the I<virtual host> on the AMQP broker to use. Defaults to "/".
602 =item B<User> I<User>
604 =item B<Password> I<Password>
606 Credentials used to authenticate to the AMQP broker. By default "guest"/"guest"
609 =item B<Exchange> I<Exchange>
611 In I<Publish> blocks, this option specifies the I<exchange> to send values to.
612 By default, "amq.fanout" will be used.
614 In I<Subscribe> blocks this option is optional. If given, a I<binding> between
615 the given exchange and the I<queue> is created, using the I<routing key> if
616 configured. See the B<Queue> and B<RoutingKey> options below.
618 =item B<ExchangeType> I<Type>
620 If given, the plugin will try to create the configured I<exchange> with this
621 I<type> after connecting. When in a I<Subscribe> block, the I<queue> will then
622 be bound to this exchange.
624 =item B<Queue> I<Queue> (Subscribe only)
626 Configures the I<queue> name to subscribe to. If no queue name was configured
627 explicitly, a unique queue name will be created by the broker.
629 =item B<QueueDurable> B<true>|B<false> (Subscribe only)
631 Defines if the I<queue> subscribed to is durable (saved to persistent storage)
632 or transient (will disappear if the AMQP broker is restarted). Defaults to
635 This option should be used in conjunction with the I<Persistent> option on the
638 =item B<QueueAutoDelete> B<true>|B<false> (Subscribe only)
640 Defines if the I<queue> subscribed to will be deleted once the last consumer
641 unsubscribes. Defaults to "true".
643 =item B<RoutingKey> I<Key>
645 In I<Publish> blocks, this configures the routing key to set on all outgoing
646 messages. If not given, the routing key will be computed from the I<identifier>
647 of the value. The host, plugin, type and the two instances are concatenated
648 together using dots as the separator and all containing dots replaced with
649 slashes. For example "collectd.host/example/com.cpu.0.cpu.user". This makes it
650 possible to receive only specific values using a "topic" exchange.
652 In I<Subscribe> blocks, configures the I<routing key> used when creating a
653 I<binding> between an I<exchange> and the I<queue>. The usual wildcards can be
654 used to filter messages when using a "topic" exchange. If you're only
655 interested in CPU statistics, you could use the routing key "collectd.*.cpu.#"
658 =item B<Persistent> B<true>|B<false> (Publish only)
660 Selects the I<delivery method> to use. If set to B<true>, the I<persistent>
661 mode will be used, i.e. delivery is guaranteed. If set to B<false> (the
662 default), the I<transient> delivery mode will be used, i.e. messages may be
663 lost due to high load, overflowing queues or similar issues.
665 =item B<ConnectionRetryDelay> I<Delay>
667 When the connection to the AMQP broker is lost, defines the time in seconds to
668 wait before attempting to reconnect. Defaults to 0, which implies collectd will
669 attempt to reconnect at each read interval (in Subscribe mode) or each time
670 values are ready for submission (in Publish mode).
672 =item B<Format> B<Command>|B<JSON>|B<Graphite> (Publish only)
674 Selects the format in which messages are sent to the broker. If set to
675 B<Command> (the default), values are sent as C<PUTVAL> commands which are
676 identical to the syntax used by the I<Exec> and I<UnixSock plugins>. In this
677 case, the C<Content-Type> header field will be set to C<text/collectd>.
679 If set to B<JSON>, the values are encoded in the I<JavaScript Object Notation>,
680 an easy and straight forward exchange format. The C<Content-Type> header field
681 will be set to C<application/json>.
683 If set to B<Graphite>, values are encoded in the I<Graphite> format, which is
684 "<metric> <value> <timestamp>\n". The C<Content-Type> header field will be set to
687 A subscribing client I<should> use the C<Content-Type> header field to
688 determine how to decode the values. Currently, the I<AMQP plugin> itself can
689 only decode the B<Command> format.
691 =item B<StoreRates> B<true>|B<false> (Publish only)
693 Determines whether or not C<COUNTER>, C<DERIVE> and C<ABSOLUTE> data sources
694 are converted to a I<rate> (i.e. a C<GAUGE> value). If set to B<false> (the
695 default), no conversion is performed. Otherwise the conversion is performed
696 using the internal value cache.
698 Please note that currently this option is only used if the B<Format> option has
701 =item B<GraphitePrefix> (Publish and B<Format>=I<Graphite> only)
703 A prefix can be added in the metric name when outputting in the I<Graphite> format.
704 It's added before the I<Host> name.
705 Metric name will be "<prefix><host><postfix><plugin><type><name>"
707 =item B<GraphitePostfix> (Publish and B<Format>=I<Graphite> only)
709 A postfix can be added in the metric name when outputting in the I<Graphite> format.
710 It's added after the I<Host> name.
711 Metric name will be "<prefix><host><postfix><plugin><type><name>"
713 =item B<GraphiteEscapeChar> (Publish and B<Format>=I<Graphite> only)
715 Specify a character to replace dots (.) in the host part of the metric name.
716 In I<Graphite> metric name, dots are used as separators between different
717 metric parts (host, plugin, type).
718 Default is "_" (I<Underscore>).
720 =item B<GraphiteSeparateInstances> B<true>|B<false>
722 If set to B<true>, the plugin instance and type instance will be in their own
723 path component, for example C<host.cpu.0.cpu.idle>. If set to B<false> (the
724 default), the plugin and plugin instance (and likewise the type and type
725 instance) are put into one component, for example C<host.cpu-0.cpu-idle>.
727 =item B<GraphiteAlwaysAppendDS> B<true>|B<false>
729 If set to B<true>, append the name of the I<Data Source> (DS) to the "metric"
730 identifier. If set to B<false> (the default), this is only done when there is
733 =item B<GraphitePreserveSeparator> B<false>|B<true>
735 If set to B<false> (the default) the C<.> (dot) character is replaced with
736 I<GraphiteEscapeChar>. Otherwise, if set to B<true>, the C<.> (dot) character
737 is preserved, i.e. passed through.
741 =head2 Plugin C<apache>
743 To configure the C<apache>-plugin you first need to configure the Apache
744 webserver correctly. The Apache-plugin C<mod_status> needs to be loaded and
745 working and the C<ExtendedStatus> directive needs to be B<enabled>. You can use
746 the following snipped to base your Apache config upon:
749 <IfModule mod_status.c>
750 <Location /mod_status>
751 SetHandler server-status
755 Since its C<mod_status> module is very similar to Apache's, B<lighttpd> is
756 also supported. It introduces a new field, called C<BusyServers>, to count the
757 number of currently connected clients. This field is also supported.
759 The configuration of the I<Apache> plugin consists of one or more
760 C<E<lt>InstanceE<nbsp>/E<gt>> blocks. Each block requires one string argument
761 as the instance name. For example:
765 URL "http://www1.example.com/mod_status?auto"
768 URL "http://www2.example.com/mod_status?auto"
772 The instance name will be used as the I<plugin instance>. To emulate the old
773 (versionE<nbsp>4) behavior, you can use an empty string (""). In order for the
774 plugin to work correctly, each instance name must be unique. This is not
775 enforced by the plugin and it is your responsibility to ensure it.
777 The following options are accepted within each I<Instance> block:
781 =item B<URL> I<http://host/mod_status?auto>
783 Sets the URL of the C<mod_status> output. This needs to be the output generated
784 by C<ExtendedStatus on> and it needs to be the machine readable output
785 generated by appending the C<?auto> argument. This option is I<mandatory>.
787 =item B<User> I<Username>
789 Optional user name needed for authentication.
791 =item B<Password> I<Password>
793 Optional password needed for authentication.
795 =item B<VerifyPeer> B<true|false>
797 Enable or disable peer SSL certificate verification. See
798 L<http://curl.haxx.se/docs/sslcerts.html> for details. Enabled by default.
800 =item B<VerifyHost> B<true|false>
802 Enable or disable peer host name verification. If enabled, the plugin checks
803 if the C<Common Name> or a C<Subject Alternate Name> field of the SSL
804 certificate matches the host name provided by the B<URL> option. If this
805 identity check fails, the connection is aborted. Obviously, only works when
806 connecting to a SSL enabled server. Enabled by default.
808 =item B<CACert> I<File>
810 File that holds one or more SSL certificates. If you want to use HTTPS you will
811 possibly need this option. What CA certificates come bundled with C<libcurl>
812 and are checked by default depends on the distribution you use.
814 =item B<SSLCiphers> I<list of ciphers>
816 Specifies which ciphers to use in the connection. The list of ciphers
817 must specify valid ciphers. See
818 L<http://www.openssl.org/docs/apps/ciphers.html> for details.
820 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
822 The B<Timeout> option sets the overall timeout for HTTP requests to B<URL>, in
823 milliseconds. By default, the configured B<Interval> is used to set the
828 =head2 Plugin C<apcups>
832 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
834 Hostname of the host running B<apcupsd>. Defaults to B<localhost>. Please note
835 that IPv6 support has been disabled unless someone can confirm or decline that
836 B<apcupsd> can handle it.
838 =item B<Port> I<Port>
840 TCP-Port to connect to. Defaults to B<3551>.
842 =item B<ReportSeconds> B<true>|B<false>
844 If set to B<true>, the time reported in the C<timeleft> metric will be
845 converted to seconds. This is the recommended setting. If set to B<false>, the
846 default for backwards compatibility, the time will be reported in minutes.
848 =item B<PersistentConnection> B<true>|B<false>
850 The plugin is designed to keep the connection to I<apcupsd> open between reads.
851 If plugin poll interval is greater than 15 seconds (hardcoded socket close
852 timeout in I<apcupsd> NIS), then this option is B<false> by default.
854 You can instruct the plugin to close the connection after each read by setting
855 this option to B<false> or force keeping the connection by setting it to B<true>.
857 If I<apcupsd> appears to close the connection due to inactivity quite quickly,
858 the plugin will try to detect this problem and switch to an open-read-close mode.
862 =head2 Plugin C<aquaero>
864 This plugin collects the value of the available sensors in an
865 I<AquaeroE<nbsp>5> board. AquaeroE<nbsp>5 is a water-cooling controller board,
866 manufactured by Aqua Computer GmbH L<http://www.aquacomputer.de/>, with a USB2
867 connection for monitoring and configuration. The board can handle multiple
868 temperature sensors, fans, water pumps and water level sensors and adjust the
869 output settings such as fan voltage or power used by the water pump based on
870 the available inputs using a configurable controller included in the board.
871 This plugin collects all the available inputs as well as some of the output
872 values chosen by this controller. The plugin is based on the I<libaquaero5>
873 library provided by I<aquatools-ng>.
877 =item B<Device> I<DevicePath>
879 Device path of the AquaeroE<nbsp>5's USB HID (human interface device), usually
880 in the form C</dev/usb/hiddevX>. If this option is no set the plugin will try
881 to auto-detect the Aquaero 5 USB device based on vendor-ID and product-ID.
885 =head2 Plugin C<ascent>
887 This plugin collects information about an Ascent server, a free server for the
888 "World of Warcraft" game. This plugin gathers the information by fetching the
889 XML status page using C<libcurl> and parses it using C<libxml2>.
891 The configuration options are the same as for the C<apache> plugin above:
895 =item B<URL> I<http://localhost/ascent/status/>
897 Sets the URL of the XML status output.
899 =item B<User> I<Username>
901 Optional user name needed for authentication.
903 =item B<Password> I<Password>
905 Optional password needed for authentication.
907 =item B<VerifyPeer> B<true|false>
909 Enable or disable peer SSL certificate verification. See
910 L<http://curl.haxx.se/docs/sslcerts.html> for details. Enabled by default.
912 =item B<VerifyHost> B<true|false>
914 Enable or disable peer host name verification. If enabled, the plugin checks
915 if the C<Common Name> or a C<Subject Alternate Name> field of the SSL
916 certificate matches the host name provided by the B<URL> option. If this
917 identity check fails, the connection is aborted. Obviously, only works when
918 connecting to a SSL enabled server. Enabled by default.
920 =item B<CACert> I<File>
922 File that holds one or more SSL certificates. If you want to use HTTPS you will
923 possibly need this option. What CA certificates come bundled with C<libcurl>
924 and are checked by default depends on the distribution you use.
926 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
928 The B<Timeout> option sets the overall timeout for HTTP requests to B<URL>, in
929 milliseconds. By default, the configured B<Interval> is used to set the
934 =head2 Plugin C<barometer>
936 This plugin reads absolute air pressure using digital barometer sensor on a I2C
937 bus. Supported sensors are:
941 =item I<MPL115A2> from Freescale,
942 see L<http://www.freescale.com/webapp/sps/site/prod_summary.jsp?code=MPL115A>.
945 =item I<MPL3115> from Freescale
946 see L<http://www.freescale.com/webapp/sps/site/prod_summary.jsp?code=MPL3115A2>.
949 =item I<BMP085> from Bosch Sensortec
953 The sensor type - one of the above - is detected automatically by the plugin
954 and indicated in the plugin_instance (you will see subdirectory
955 "barometer-mpl115" or "barometer-mpl3115", or "barometer-bmp085"). The order of
956 detection is BMP085 -> MPL3115 -> MPL115A2, the first one found will be used
957 (only one sensor can be used by the plugin).
959 The plugin provides absolute barometric pressure, air pressure reduced to sea
960 level (several possible approximations) and as an auxiliary value also internal
961 sensor temperature. It uses (expects/provides) typical metric units - pressure
962 in [hPa], temperature in [C], altitude in [m].
964 It was developed and tested under Linux only. The only platform dependency is
965 the standard Linux i2c-dev interface (the particular bus driver has to
966 support the SM Bus command subset).
968 The reduction or normalization to mean sea level pressure requires (depending
969 on selected method/approximation) also altitude and reference to temperature
970 sensor(s). When multiple temperature sensors are configured the minimum of
971 their values is always used (expecting that the warmer ones are affected by
972 e.g. direct sun light at that moment).
980 TemperatureOffset 0.0
983 TemperatureSensor "myserver/onewire-F10FCA000800/temperature"
988 =item B<Device> I<device>
990 The only mandatory configuration parameter.
992 Device name of the I2C bus to which the sensor is connected. Note that
993 typically you need to have loaded the i2c-dev module.
994 Using i2c-tools you can check/list i2c buses available on your system by:
998 Then you can scan for devices on given bus. E.g. to scan the whole bus 0 use:
1002 This way you should be able to verify that the pressure sensor (either type) is
1003 connected and detected on address 0x60.
1005 =item B<Oversampling> I<value>
1007 Optional parameter controlling the oversampling/accuracy. Default value
1008 is 1 providing fastest and least accurate reading.
1010 For I<MPL115> this is the size of the averaging window. To filter out sensor
1011 noise a simple averaging using floating window of this configurable size is
1012 used. The plugin will use average of the last C<value> measurements (value of 1
1013 means no averaging). Minimal size is 1, maximal 1024.
1015 For I<MPL3115> this is the oversampling value. The actual oversampling is
1016 performed by the sensor and the higher value the higher accuracy and longer
1017 conversion time (although nothing to worry about in the collectd context).
1018 Supported values are: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 and 128. Any other value is
1019 adjusted by the plugin to the closest supported one.
1021 For I<BMP085> this is the oversampling value. The actual oversampling is
1022 performed by the sensor and the higher value the higher accuracy and longer
1023 conversion time (although nothing to worry about in the collectd context).
1024 Supported values are: 1, 2, 4, 8. Any other value is adjusted by the plugin to
1025 the closest supported one.
1027 =item B<PressureOffset> I<offset>
1029 Optional parameter for MPL3115 only.
1031 You can further calibrate the sensor by supplying pressure and/or temperature
1032 offsets. This is added to the measured/caclulated value (i.e. if the measured
1033 value is too high then use negative offset).
1034 In hPa, default is 0.0.
1036 =item B<TemperatureOffset> I<offset>
1038 Optional parameter for MPL3115 only.
1040 You can further calibrate the sensor by supplying pressure and/or temperature
1041 offsets. This is added to the measured/caclulated value (i.e. if the measured
1042 value is too high then use negative offset).
1043 In C, default is 0.0.
1045 =item B<Normalization> I<method>
1047 Optional parameter, default value is 0.
1049 Normalization method - what approximation/model is used to compute the mean sea
1050 level pressure from the air absolute pressure.
1052 Supported values of the C<method> (integer between from 0 to 2) are:
1056 =item B<0> - no conversion, absolute pressure is simply copied over. For this method you
1057 do not need to configure C<Altitude> or C<TemperatureSensor>.
1059 =item B<1> - international formula for conversion ,
1061 L<http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Atmospheric_pressure#Altitude_atmospheric_pressure_variation>.
1062 For this method you have to configure C<Altitude> but do not need
1063 C<TemperatureSensor> (uses fixed global temperature average instead).
1065 =item B<2> - formula as recommended by the Deutsche Wetterdienst (German
1066 Meteorological Service).
1067 See L<http://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Barometrische_H%C3%B6henformel#Theorie>
1068 For this method you have to configure both C<Altitude> and
1069 C<TemperatureSensor>.
1074 =item B<Altitude> I<altitude>
1076 The altitude (in meters) of the location where you meassure the pressure.
1078 =item B<TemperatureSensor> I<reference>
1080 Temperature sensor(s) which should be used as a reference when normalizing the
1081 pressure using C<Normalization> method 2.
1082 When specified more sensors a minimum is found and used each time. The
1083 temperature reading directly from this pressure sensor/plugin is typically not
1084 suitable as the pressure sensor will be probably inside while we want outside
1085 temperature. The collectd reference name is something like
1086 <hostname>/<plugin_name>-<plugin_instance>/<type>-<type_instance>
1087 (<type_instance> is usually omitted when there is just single value type). Or
1088 you can figure it out from the path of the output data files.
1092 =head2 Plugin C<battery>
1094 The I<battery plugin> reports the remaining capacity, power and voltage of
1099 =item B<ValuesPercentage> B<false>|B<true>
1101 When enabled, remaining capacity is reported as a percentage, e.g. "42%
1102 capacity remaining". Otherwise the capacity is stored as reported by the
1103 battery, most likely in "Wh". This option does not work with all input methods,
1104 in particular when only C</proc/pmu> is available on an old Linux system.
1105 Defaults to B<false>.
1107 =item B<ReportDegraded> B<false>|B<true>
1109 Typical laptop batteries degrade over time, meaning the capacity decreases with
1110 recharge cycles. The maximum charge of the previous charge cycle is tracked as
1111 "last full capacity" and used to determine that a battery is "fully charged".
1113 When this option is set to B<false>, the default, the I<battery plugin> will
1114 only report the remaining capacity. If the B<ValuesPercentage> option is
1115 enabled, the relative remaining capacity is calculated as the ratio of the
1116 "remaining capacity" and the "last full capacity". This is what most tools,
1117 such as the status bar of desktop environments, also do.
1119 When set to B<true>, the battery plugin will report three values: B<charged>
1120 (remaining capacity), B<discharged> (difference between "last full capacity"
1121 and "remaining capacity") and B<degraded> (difference between "design capacity"
1122 and "last full capacity").
1124 =item B<QueryStateFS> B<false>|B<true>
1126 When set to B<true>, the battery plugin will only read statistics
1127 related to battery performance as exposed by StateFS at
1128 /run/state. StateFS is used in Mer-based Sailfish OS, for
1133 =head2 Plugin C<bind>
1135 Starting with BIND 9.5.0, the most widely used DNS server software provides
1136 extensive statistics about queries, responses and lots of other information.
1137 The bind plugin retrieves this information that's encoded in XML and provided
1138 via HTTP and submits the values to collectd.
1140 To use this plugin, you first need to tell BIND to make this information
1141 available. This is done with the C<statistics-channels> configuration option:
1143 statistics-channels {
1144 inet localhost port 8053;
1147 The configuration follows the grouping that can be seen when looking at the
1148 data with an XSLT compatible viewer, such as a modern web browser. It's
1149 probably a good idea to make yourself familiar with the provided values, so you
1150 can understand what the collected statistics actually mean.
1155 URL "http://localhost:8053/"
1170 Zone "127.in-addr.arpa/IN"
1174 The bind plugin accepts the following configuration options:
1180 URL from which to retrieve the XML data. If not specified,
1181 C<http://localhost:8053/> will be used.
1183 =item B<ParseTime> B<true>|B<false>
1185 When set to B<true>, the time provided by BIND will be parsed and used to
1186 dispatch the values. When set to B<false>, the local time source is queried.
1188 This setting is set to B<true> by default for backwards compatibility; setting
1189 this to B<false> is I<recommended> to avoid problems with timezones and
1192 =item B<OpCodes> B<true>|B<false>
1194 When enabled, statistics about the I<"OpCodes">, for example the number of
1195 C<QUERY> packets, are collected.
1199 =item B<QTypes> B<true>|B<false>
1201 When enabled, the number of I<incoming> queries by query types (for example
1202 C<A>, C<MX>, C<AAAA>) is collected.
1206 =item B<ServerStats> B<true>|B<false>
1208 Collect global server statistics, such as requests received over IPv4 and IPv6,
1209 successful queries, and failed updates.
1213 =item B<ZoneMaintStats> B<true>|B<false>
1215 Collect zone maintenance statistics, mostly information about notifications
1216 (zone updates) and zone transfers.
1220 =item B<ResolverStats> B<true>|B<false>
1222 Collect resolver statistics, i.E<nbsp>e. statistics about outgoing requests
1223 (e.E<nbsp>g. queries over IPv4, lame servers). Since the global resolver
1224 counters apparently were removed in BIND 9.5.1 and 9.6.0, this is disabled by
1225 default. Use the B<ResolverStats> option within a B<View "_default"> block
1226 instead for the same functionality.
1230 =item B<MemoryStats>
1232 Collect global memory statistics.
1236 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
1238 The B<Timeout> option sets the overall timeout for HTTP requests to B<URL>, in
1239 milliseconds. By default, the configured B<Interval> is used to set the
1242 =item B<View> I<Name>
1244 Collect statistics about a specific I<"view">. BIND can behave different,
1245 mostly depending on the source IP-address of the request. These different
1246 configurations are called "views". If you don't use this feature, you most
1247 likely are only interested in the C<_default> view.
1249 Within a E<lt>B<View>E<nbsp>I<name>E<gt> block, you can specify which
1250 information you want to collect about a view. If no B<View> block is
1251 configured, no detailed view statistics will be collected.
1255 =item B<QTypes> B<true>|B<false>
1257 If enabled, the number of I<outgoing> queries by query type (e.E<nbsp>g. C<A>,
1258 C<MX>) is collected.
1262 =item B<ResolverStats> B<true>|B<false>
1264 Collect resolver statistics, i.E<nbsp>e. statistics about outgoing requests
1265 (e.E<nbsp>g. queries over IPv4, lame servers).
1269 =item B<CacheRRSets> B<true>|B<false>
1271 If enabled, the number of entries (I<"RR sets">) in the view's cache by query
1272 type is collected. Negative entries (queries which resulted in an error, for
1273 example names that do not exist) are reported with a leading exclamation mark,
1278 =item B<Zone> I<Name>
1280 When given, collect detailed information about the given zone in the view. The
1281 information collected if very similar to the global B<ServerStats> information
1284 You can repeat this option to collect detailed information about multiple
1287 By default no detailed zone information is collected.
1293 =head2 Plugin C<ceph>
1295 The ceph plugin collects values from JSON data to be parsed by B<libyajl>
1296 (L<https://lloyd.github.io/yajl/>) retrieved from ceph daemon admin sockets.
1298 A separate B<Daemon> block must be configured for each ceph daemon to be
1299 monitored. The following example will read daemon statistics from four
1300 separate ceph daemons running on the same device (two OSDs, one MON, one MDS) :
1303 LongRunAvgLatency false
1304 ConvertSpecialMetricTypes true
1306 SocketPath "/var/run/ceph/ceph-osd.0.asok"
1309 SocketPath "/var/run/ceph/ceph-osd.1.asok"
1312 SocketPath "/var/run/ceph/ceph-mon.ceph1.asok"
1315 SocketPath "/var/run/ceph/ceph-mds.ceph1.asok"
1319 The ceph plugin accepts the following configuration options:
1323 =item B<LongRunAvgLatency> B<true>|B<false>
1325 If enabled, latency values(sum,count pairs) are calculated as the long run
1326 average - average since the ceph daemon was started = (sum / count).
1327 When disabled, latency values are calculated as the average since the last
1328 collection = (sum_now - sum_last) / (count_now - count_last).
1332 =item B<ConvertSpecialMetricTypes> B<true>|B<false>
1334 If enabled, special metrics (metrics that differ in type from similar counters)
1335 are converted to the type of those similar counters. This currently only
1336 applies to filestore.journal_wr_bytes which is a counter for OSD daemons. The
1337 ceph schema reports this metric type as a sum,count pair while similar counters
1338 are treated as derive types. When converted, the sum is used as the counter
1339 value and is treated as a derive type.
1340 When disabled, all metrics are treated as the types received from the ceph schema.
1346 Each B<Daemon> block must have a string argument for the plugin instance name.
1347 A B<SocketPath> is also required for each B<Daemon> block:
1351 =item B<Daemon> I<DaemonName>
1353 Name to be used as the instance name for this daemon.
1355 =item B<SocketPath> I<SocketPath>
1357 Specifies the path to the UNIX admin socket of the ceph daemon.
1361 =head2 Plugin C<cgroups>
1363 This plugin collects the CPU user/system time for each I<cgroup> by reading the
1364 F<cpuacct.stat> files in the first cpuacct-mountpoint (typically
1365 F</sys/fs/cgroup/cpu.cpuacct> on machines using systemd).
1369 =item B<CGroup> I<Directory>
1371 Select I<cgroup> based on the name. Whether only matching I<cgroups> are
1372 collected or if they are ignored is controlled by the B<IgnoreSelected> option;
1375 =item B<IgnoreSelected> B<true>|B<false>
1377 Invert the selection: If set to true, all cgroups I<except> the ones that
1378 match any one of the criteria are collected. By default only selected
1379 cgroups are collected if a selection is made. If no selection is configured
1380 at all, B<all> cgroups are selected.
1384 =head2 Plugin C<chrony>
1386 The C<chrony> plugin collects ntp data from a B<chronyd> server, such as clock
1387 skew and per-peer stratum.
1389 For talking to B<chronyd>, it mimics what the B<chronyc> control program does
1392 Available configuration options for the C<chrony> plugin:
1396 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
1398 Hostname of the host running B<chronyd>. Defaults to B<localhost>.
1400 =item B<Port> I<Port>
1402 UDP-Port to connect to. Defaults to B<323>.
1404 =item B<Timeout> I<Timeout>
1406 Connection timeout in seconds. Defaults to B<2>.
1410 =head2 Plugin C<conntrack>
1412 This plugin collects IP conntrack statistics.
1418 Assume the B<conntrack_count> and B<conntrack_max> files to be found in
1419 F</proc/sys/net/ipv4/netfilter> instead of F</proc/sys/net/netfilter/>.
1423 =head2 Plugin C<cpu>
1425 The I<CPU plugin> collects CPU usage metrics. By default, CPU usage is reported
1426 as Jiffies, using the C<cpu> type. Two aggregations are available:
1432 Sum, per-state, over all CPUs installed in the system; and
1436 Sum, per-CPU, over all non-idle states of a CPU, creating an "active" state.
1440 The two aggregations can be combined, leading to I<collectd> only emitting a
1441 single "active" metric for the entire system. As soon as one of these
1442 aggregations (or both) is enabled, the I<cpu plugin> will report a percentage,
1443 rather than Jiffies. In addition, you can request individual, per-state,
1444 per-CPU metrics to be reported as percentage.
1446 The following configuration options are available:
1450 =item B<ReportByState> B<true>|B<false>
1452 When set to B<true>, the default, reports per-state metrics, e.g. "system",
1454 When set to B<false>, aggregates (sums) all I<non-idle> states into one
1457 =item B<ReportByCpu> B<true>|B<false>
1459 When set to B<true>, the default, reports per-CPU (per-core) metrics.
1460 When set to B<false>, instead of reporting metrics for individual CPUs, only a
1461 global sum of CPU states is emitted.
1463 =item B<ValuesPercentage> B<false>|B<true>
1465 This option is only considered when both, B<ReportByCpu> and B<ReportByState>
1466 are set to B<true>. In this case, by default, metrics will be reported as
1467 Jiffies. By setting this option to B<true>, you can request percentage values
1468 in the un-aggregated (per-CPU, per-state) mode as well.
1470 =item B<ReportNumCpu> B<false>|B<true>
1472 When set to B<true>, reports the number of available CPUs.
1473 Defaults to B<false>.
1477 =head2 Plugin C<cpufreq>
1479 This plugin doesn't have any options. It reads
1480 F</sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/cpufreq/scaling_cur_freq> (for the first CPU
1481 installed) to get the current CPU frequency. If this file does not exist make
1482 sure B<cpufreqd> (L<http://cpufreqd.sourceforge.net/>) or a similar tool is
1483 installed and an "cpu governor" (that's a kernel module) is loaded.
1485 =head2 Plugin C<cpusleep>
1487 This plugin doesn't have any options. It reads CLOCK_BOOTTIME and
1488 CLOCK_MONOTONIC and reports the difference between these clocks. Since
1489 BOOTTIME clock increments while device is suspended and MONOTONIC
1490 clock does not, the derivative of the difference between these clocks
1491 gives the relative amount of time the device has spent in suspend
1492 state. The recorded value is in milliseconds of sleep per seconds of
1495 =head2 Plugin C<csv>
1499 =item B<DataDir> I<Directory>
1501 Set the directory to store CSV-files under. Per default CSV-files are generated
1502 beneath the daemon's working directory, i.E<nbsp>e. the B<BaseDir>.
1503 The special strings B<stdout> and B<stderr> can be used to write to the standard
1504 output and standard error channels, respectively. This, of course, only makes
1505 much sense when collectd is running in foreground- or non-daemon-mode.
1507 =item B<StoreRates> B<true|false>
1509 If set to B<true>, convert counter values to rates. If set to B<false> (the
1510 default) counter values are stored as is, i.E<nbsp>e. as an increasing integer
1515 =head2 cURL Statistics
1517 All cURL-based plugins support collection of generic, request-based
1518 statistics. These are disabled by default and can be enabled selectively for
1519 each page or URL queried from the curl, curl_json, or curl_xml plugins. See
1520 the documentation of those plugins for specific information. This section
1521 describes the available metrics that can be configured for each plugin. All
1522 options are disabled by default.
1524 See L<http://curl.haxx.se/libcurl/c/curl_easy_getinfo.html> for more details.
1528 =item B<TotalTime> B<true|false>
1530 Total time of the transfer, including name resolving, TCP connect, etc.
1532 =item B<NamelookupTime> B<true|false>
1534 Time it took from the start until name resolving was completed.
1536 =item B<ConnectTime> B<true|false>
1538 Time it took from the start until the connect to the remote host (or proxy)
1541 =item B<AppconnectTime> B<true|false>
1543 Time it took from the start until the SSL/SSH connect/handshake to the remote
1546 =item B<PretransferTime> B<true|false>
1548 Time it took from the start until just before the transfer begins.
1550 =item B<StarttransferTime> B<true|false>
1552 Time it took from the start until the first byte was received.
1554 =item B<RedirectTime> B<true|false>
1556 Time it took for all redirection steps include name lookup, connect,
1557 pre-transfer and transfer before final transaction was started.
1559 =item B<RedirectCount> B<true|false>
1561 The total number of redirections that were actually followed.
1563 =item B<SizeUpload> B<true|false>
1565 The total amount of bytes that were uploaded.
1567 =item B<SizeDownload> B<true|false>
1569 The total amount of bytes that were downloaded.
1571 =item B<SpeedDownload> B<true|false>
1573 The average download speed that curl measured for the complete download.
1575 =item B<SpeedUpload> B<true|false>
1577 The average upload speed that curl measured for the complete upload.
1579 =item B<HeaderSize> B<true|false>
1581 The total size of all the headers received.
1583 =item B<RequestSize> B<true|false>
1585 The total size of the issued requests.
1587 =item B<ContentLengthDownload> B<true|false>
1589 The content-length of the download.
1591 =item B<ContentLengthUpload> B<true|false>
1593 The specified size of the upload.
1595 =item B<NumConnects> B<true|false>
1597 The number of new connections that were created to achieve the transfer.
1601 =head2 Plugin C<curl>
1603 The curl plugin uses the B<libcurl> (L<http://curl.haxx.se/>) to read web pages
1604 and the match infrastructure (the same code used by the tail plugin) to use
1605 regular expressions with the received data.
1607 The following example will read the current value of AMD stock from Google's
1608 finance page and dispatch the value to collectd.
1611 <Page "stock_quotes">
1612 URL "http://finance.google.com/finance?q=NYSE%3AAMD"
1618 CACert "/path/to/ca.crt"
1619 Header "X-Custom-Header: foobar"
1622 MeasureResponseTime false
1623 MeasureResponseCode false
1626 Regex "<span +class=\"pr\"[^>]*> *([0-9]*\\.[0-9]+) *</span>"
1627 DSType "GaugeAverage"
1628 # Note: `stock_value' is not a standard type.
1635 In the B<Plugin> block, there may be one or more B<Page> blocks, each defining
1636 a web page and one or more "matches" to be performed on the returned data. The
1637 string argument to the B<Page> block is used as plugin instance.
1639 The following options are valid within B<Page> blocks:
1645 URL of the web site to retrieve. Since a regular expression will be used to
1646 extract information from this data, non-binary data is a big plus here ;)
1648 =item B<User> I<Name>
1650 Username to use if authorization is required to read the page.
1652 =item B<Password> I<Password>
1654 Password to use if authorization is required to read the page.
1656 =item B<Digest> B<true>|B<false>
1658 Enable HTTP digest authentication.
1660 =item B<VerifyPeer> B<true>|B<false>
1662 Enable or disable peer SSL certificate verification. See
1663 L<http://curl.haxx.se/docs/sslcerts.html> for details. Enabled by default.
1665 =item B<VerifyHost> B<true>|B<false>
1667 Enable or disable peer host name verification. If enabled, the plugin checks if
1668 the C<Common Name> or a C<Subject Alternate Name> field of the SSL certificate
1669 matches the host name provided by the B<URL> option. If this identity check
1670 fails, the connection is aborted. Obviously, only works when connecting to a
1671 SSL enabled server. Enabled by default.
1673 =item B<CACert> I<file>
1675 File that holds one or more SSL certificates. If you want to use HTTPS you will
1676 possibly need this option. What CA certificates come bundled with C<libcurl>
1677 and are checked by default depends on the distribution you use.
1679 =item B<Header> I<Header>
1681 A HTTP header to add to the request. Multiple headers are added if this option
1682 is specified more than once.
1684 =item B<Post> I<Body>
1686 Specifies that the HTTP operation should be a POST instead of a GET. The
1687 complete data to be posted is given as the argument. This option will usually
1688 need to be accompanied by a B<Header> option to set an appropriate
1689 C<Content-Type> for the post body (e.g. to
1690 C<application/x-www-form-urlencoded>).
1692 =item B<MeasureResponseTime> B<true>|B<false>
1694 Measure response time for the request. If this setting is enabled, B<Match>
1695 blocks (see below) are optional. Disabled by default.
1697 Beware that requests will get aborted if they take too long to complete. Adjust
1698 B<Timeout> accordingly if you expect B<MeasureResponseTime> to report such slow
1701 This option is similar to enabling the B<TotalTime> statistic but it's
1702 measured by collectd instead of cURL.
1704 =item B<MeasureResponseCode> B<true>|B<false>
1706 Measure response code for the request. If this setting is enabled, B<Match>
1707 blocks (see below) are optional. Disabled by default.
1709 =item B<E<lt>StatisticsE<gt>>
1711 One B<Statistics> block can be used to specify cURL statistics to be collected
1712 for each request to the remote web site. See the section "cURL Statistics"
1713 above for details. If this setting is enabled, B<Match> blocks (see below) are
1716 =item B<E<lt>MatchE<gt>>
1718 One or more B<Match> blocks that define how to match information in the data
1719 returned by C<libcurl>. The C<curl> plugin uses the same infrastructure that's
1720 used by the C<tail> plugin, so please see the documentation of the C<tail>
1721 plugin below on how matches are defined. If the B<MeasureResponseTime> or
1722 B<MeasureResponseCode> options are set to B<true>, B<Match> blocks are
1725 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
1727 The B<Timeout> option sets the overall timeout for HTTP requests to B<URL>, in
1728 milliseconds. By default, the configured B<Interval> is used to set the
1729 timeout. Prior to version 5.5.0, there was no timeout and requests could hang
1730 indefinitely. This legacy behaviour can be achieved by setting the value of
1733 If B<Timeout> is 0 or bigger than the B<Interval>, keep in mind that each slow
1734 network connection will stall one read thread. Adjust the B<ReadThreads> global
1735 setting accordingly to prevent this from blocking other plugins.
1739 =head2 Plugin C<curl_json>
1741 The B<curl_json plugin> collects values from JSON data to be parsed by
1742 B<libyajl> (L<https://lloyd.github.io/yajl/>) retrieved via
1743 either B<libcurl> (L<http://curl.haxx.se/>) or read directly from a
1744 unix socket. The former can be used, for example, to collect values
1745 from CouchDB documents (which are stored JSON notation), and the
1746 latter to collect values from a uWSGI stats socket.
1748 The following example will collect several values from the built-in
1749 C<_stats> runtime statistics module of I<CouchDB>
1750 (L<http://wiki.apache.org/couchdb/Runtime_Statistics>).
1753 <URL "http://localhost:5984/_stats">
1755 <Key "httpd/requests/count">
1756 Type "http_requests"
1759 <Key "httpd_request_methods/*/count">
1760 Type "http_request_methods"
1763 <Key "httpd_status_codes/*/count">
1764 Type "http_response_codes"
1769 This example will collect data directly from a I<uWSGI> "Stats Server" socket.
1772 <Sock "/var/run/uwsgi.stats.sock">
1774 <Key "workers/*/requests">
1775 Type "http_requests"
1778 <Key "workers/*/apps/*/requests">
1779 Type "http_requests"
1784 In the B<Plugin> block, there may be one or more B<URL> blocks, each
1785 defining a URL to be fetched via HTTP (using libcurl) or B<Sock>
1786 blocks defining a unix socket to read JSON from directly. Each of
1787 these blocks may have one or more B<Key> blocks.
1789 The B<Key> string argument must be in a path format. Each component is
1790 used to match the key from a JSON map or the index of an JSON
1791 array. If a path component of a B<Key> is a I<*>E<nbsp>wildcard, the
1792 values for all map keys or array indices will be collectd.
1794 The following options are valid within B<URL> blocks:
1798 =item B<Host> I<Name>
1800 Use I<Name> as the host name when submitting values. Defaults to the global
1803 =item B<Instance> I<Instance>
1805 Sets the plugin instance to I<Instance>.
1807 =item B<Interval> I<Interval>
1809 Sets the interval (in seconds) in which the values will be collected from this
1810 URL. By default the global B<Interval> setting will be used.
1812 =item B<User> I<Name>
1814 =item B<Password> I<Password>
1816 =item B<Digest> B<true>|B<false>
1818 =item B<VerifyPeer> B<true>|B<false>
1820 =item B<VerifyHost> B<true>|B<false>
1822 =item B<CACert> I<file>
1824 =item B<Header> I<Header>
1826 =item B<Post> I<Body>
1828 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
1830 These options behave exactly equivalent to the appropriate options of the
1831 I<cURL> plugin. Please see there for a detailed description.
1833 =item B<E<lt>StatisticsE<gt>>
1835 One B<Statistics> block can be used to specify cURL statistics to be collected
1836 for each request to the remote URL. See the section "cURL Statistics" above
1841 The following options are valid within B<Key> blocks:
1845 =item B<Type> I<Type>
1847 Sets the type used to dispatch the values to the daemon. Detailed information
1848 about types and their configuration can be found in L<types.db(5)>. This
1849 option is mandatory.
1851 =item B<Instance> I<Instance>
1853 Type-instance to use. Defaults to the current map key or current string array element value.
1857 =head2 Plugin C<curl_xml>
1859 The B<curl_xml plugin> uses B<libcurl> (L<http://curl.haxx.se/>) and B<libxml2>
1860 (L<http://xmlsoft.org/>) to retrieve XML data via cURL.
1863 <URL "http://localhost/stats.xml">
1865 Instance "some_instance"
1870 CACert "/path/to/ca.crt"
1871 Header "X-Custom-Header: foobar"
1874 <XPath "table[@id=\"magic_level\"]/tr">
1876 #InstancePrefix "prefix-"
1877 InstanceFrom "td[1]"
1878 ValuesFrom "td[2]/span[@class=\"level\"]"
1883 In the B<Plugin> block, there may be one or more B<URL> blocks, each defining a
1884 URL to be fetched using libcurl. Within each B<URL> block there are
1885 options which specify the connection parameters, for example authentication
1886 information, and one or more B<XPath> blocks.
1888 Each B<XPath> block specifies how to get one type of information. The
1889 string argument must be a valid XPath expression which returns a list
1890 of "base elements". One value is dispatched for each "base element". The
1891 I<type instance> and values are looked up using further I<XPath> expressions
1892 that should be relative to the base element.
1894 Within the B<URL> block the following options are accepted:
1898 =item B<Host> I<Name>
1900 Use I<Name> as the host name when submitting values. Defaults to the global
1903 =item B<Instance> I<Instance>
1905 Use I<Instance> as the plugin instance when submitting values. Defaults to an
1906 empty string (no plugin instance).
1908 =item B<Namespace> I<Prefix> I<URL>
1910 If an XPath expression references namespaces, they must be specified
1911 with this option. I<Prefix> is the "namespace prefix" used in the XML document.
1912 I<URL> is the "namespace name", an URI reference uniquely identifying the
1913 namespace. The option can be repeated to register multiple namespaces.
1917 Namespace "s" "http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/soap/envelope/"
1918 Namespace "m" "http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
1920 =item B<User> I<User>
1922 =item B<Password> I<Password>
1924 =item B<Digest> B<true>|B<false>
1926 =item B<VerifyPeer> B<true>|B<false>
1928 =item B<VerifyHost> B<true>|B<false>
1930 =item B<CACert> I<CA Cert File>
1932 =item B<Header> I<Header>
1934 =item B<Post> I<Body>
1936 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
1938 These options behave exactly equivalent to the appropriate options of the
1939 I<cURL plugin>. Please see there for a detailed description.
1941 =item B<E<lt>StatisticsE<gt>>
1943 One B<Statistics> block can be used to specify cURL statistics to be collected
1944 for each request to the remote URL. See the section "cURL Statistics" above
1947 =item E<lt>B<XPath> I<XPath-expression>E<gt>
1949 Within each B<URL> block, there must be one or more B<XPath> blocks. Each
1950 B<XPath> block specifies how to get one type of information. The string
1951 argument must be a valid XPath expression which returns a list of "base
1952 elements". One value is dispatched for each "base element".
1954 Within the B<XPath> block the following options are accepted:
1958 =item B<Type> I<Type>
1960 Specifies the I<Type> used for submitting patches. This determines the number
1961 of values that are required / expected and whether the strings are parsed as
1962 signed or unsigned integer or as double values. See L<types.db(5)> for details.
1963 This option is required.
1965 =item B<InstancePrefix> I<InstancePrefix>
1967 Prefix the I<type instance> with I<InstancePrefix>. The values are simply
1968 concatenated together without any separator.
1969 This option is optional.
1971 =item B<InstanceFrom> I<InstanceFrom>
1973 Specifies a XPath expression to use for determining the I<type instance>. The
1974 XPath expression must return exactly one element. The element's value is then
1975 used as I<type instance>, possibly prefixed with I<InstancePrefix> (see above).
1977 This value is required. As a special exception, if the "base XPath expression"
1978 (the argument to the B<XPath> block) returns exactly one argument, then this
1979 option may be omitted.
1981 =item B<ValuesFrom> I<ValuesFrom> [I<ValuesFrom> ...]
1983 Specifies one or more XPath expression to use for reading the values. The
1984 number of XPath expressions must match the number of data sources in the
1985 I<type> specified with B<Type> (see above). Each XPath expression must return
1986 exactly one element. The element's value is then parsed as a number and used as
1987 value for the appropriate value in the value list dispatched to the daemon.
1993 =head2 Plugin C<dbi>
1995 This plugin uses the B<dbi> library (L<http://libdbi.sourceforge.net/>) to
1996 connect to various databases, execute I<SQL> statements and read back the
1997 results. I<dbi> is an acronym for "database interface" in case you were
1998 wondering about the name. You can configure how each column is to be
1999 interpreted and the plugin will generate one or more data sets from each row
2000 returned according to these rules.
2002 Because the plugin is very generic, the configuration is a little more complex
2003 than those of other plugins. It usually looks something like this:
2006 <Query "out_of_stock">
2007 Statement "SELECT category, COUNT(*) AS value FROM products WHERE in_stock = 0 GROUP BY category"
2008 # Use with MySQL 5.0.0 or later
2012 InstancePrefix "out_of_stock"
2013 InstancesFrom "category"
2017 <Database "product_information">
2020 DriverOption "host" "localhost"
2021 DriverOption "username" "collectd"
2022 DriverOption "password" "aZo6daiw"
2023 DriverOption "dbname" "prod_info"
2024 SelectDB "prod_info"
2025 Query "out_of_stock"
2029 The configuration above defines one query with one result and one database. The
2030 query is then linked to the database with the B<Query> option I<within> the
2031 B<E<lt>DatabaseE<gt>> block. You can have any number of queries and databases
2032 and you can also use the B<Include> statement to split up the configuration
2033 file in multiple, smaller files. However, the B<E<lt>QueryE<gt>> block I<must>
2034 precede the B<E<lt>DatabaseE<gt>> blocks, because the file is interpreted from
2037 The following is a complete list of options:
2039 =head3 B<Query> blocks
2041 Query blocks define I<SQL> statements and how the returned data should be
2042 interpreted. They are identified by the name that is given in the opening line
2043 of the block. Thus the name needs to be unique. Other than that, the name is
2044 not used in collectd.
2046 In each B<Query> block, there is one or more B<Result> blocks. B<Result> blocks
2047 define which column holds which value or instance information. You can use
2048 multiple B<Result> blocks to create multiple values from one returned row. This
2049 is especially useful, when queries take a long time and sending almost the same
2050 query again and again is not desirable.
2054 <Query "environment">
2055 Statement "select station, temperature, humidity from environment"
2058 # InstancePrefix "foo"
2059 InstancesFrom "station"
2060 ValuesFrom "temperature"
2064 InstancesFrom "station"
2065 ValuesFrom "humidity"
2069 The following options are accepted:
2073 =item B<Statement> I<SQL>
2075 Sets the statement that should be executed on the server. This is B<not>
2076 interpreted by collectd, but simply passed to the database server. Therefore,
2077 the SQL dialect that's used depends on the server collectd is connected to.
2079 The query has to return at least two columns, one for the instance and one
2080 value. You cannot omit the instance, even if the statement is guaranteed to
2081 always return exactly one line. In that case, you can usually specify something
2084 Statement "SELECT \"instance\", COUNT(*) AS value FROM table"
2086 (That works with MySQL but may not be valid SQL according to the spec. If you
2087 use a more strict database server, you may have to select from a dummy table or
2090 Please note that some databases, for example B<Oracle>, will fail if you
2091 include a semicolon at the end of the statement.
2093 =item B<MinVersion> I<Version>
2095 =item B<MaxVersion> I<Value>
2097 Only use this query for the specified database version. You can use these
2098 options to provide multiple queries with the same name but with a slightly
2099 different syntax. The plugin will use only those queries, where the specified
2100 minimum and maximum versions fit the version of the database in use.
2102 The database version is determined by C<dbi_conn_get_engine_version>, see the
2103 L<libdbi documentation|http://libdbi.sourceforge.net/docs/programmers-guide/reference-conn.html#DBI-CONN-GET-ENGINE-VERSION>
2104 for details. Basically, each part of the version is assumed to be in the range
2105 from B<00> to B<99> and all dots are removed. So version "4.1.2" becomes
2106 "40102", version "5.0.42" becomes "50042".
2108 B<Warning:> The plugin will use B<all> matching queries, so if you specify
2109 multiple queries with the same name and B<overlapping> ranges, weird stuff will
2110 happen. Don't to it! A valid example would be something along these lines:
2121 In the above example, there are three ranges that don't overlap. The last one
2122 goes from version "5.1.0" to infinity, meaning "all later versions". Versions
2123 before "4.0.0" are not specified.
2125 =item B<Type> I<Type>
2127 The B<type> that's used for each line returned. See L<types.db(5)> for more
2128 details on how types are defined. In short: A type is a predefined layout of
2129 data and the number of values and type of values has to match the type
2132 If you specify "temperature" here, you need exactly one gauge column. If you
2133 specify "if_octets", you will need two counter columns. See the B<ValuesFrom>
2136 There must be exactly one B<Type> option inside each B<Result> block.
2138 =item B<InstancePrefix> I<prefix>
2140 Prepends I<prefix> to the type instance. If B<InstancesFrom> (see below) is not
2141 given, the string is simply copied. If B<InstancesFrom> is given, I<prefix> and
2142 all strings returned in the appropriate columns are concatenated together,
2143 separated by dashes I<("-")>.
2145 =item B<InstancesFrom> I<column0> [I<column1> ...]
2147 Specifies the columns whose values will be used to create the "type-instance"
2148 for each row. If you specify more than one column, the value of all columns
2149 will be joined together with dashes I<("-")> as separation characters.
2151 The plugin itself does not check whether or not all built instances are
2152 different. It's your responsibility to assure that each is unique. This is
2153 especially true, if you do not specify B<InstancesFrom>: B<You> have to make
2154 sure that only one row is returned in this case.
2156 If neither B<InstancePrefix> nor B<InstancesFrom> is given, the type-instance
2159 =item B<ValuesFrom> I<column0> [I<column1> ...]
2161 Names the columns whose content is used as the actual data for the data sets
2162 that are dispatched to the daemon. How many such columns you need is determined
2163 by the B<Type> setting above. If you specify too many or not enough columns,
2164 the plugin will complain about that and no data will be submitted to the
2167 The actual data type in the columns is not that important. The plugin will
2168 automatically cast the values to the right type if it know how to do that. So
2169 it should be able to handle integer an floating point types, as well as strings
2170 (if they include a number at the beginning).
2172 There must be at least one B<ValuesFrom> option inside each B<Result> block.
2174 =item B<MetadataFrom> [I<column0> I<column1> ...]
2176 Names the columns whose content is used as metadata for the data sets
2177 that are dispatched to the daemon.
2179 The actual data type in the columns is not that important. The plugin will
2180 automatically cast the values to the right type if it know how to do that. So
2181 it should be able to handle integer an floating point types, as well as strings
2182 (if they include a number at the beginning).
2186 =head3 B<Database> blocks
2188 Database blocks define a connection to a database and which queries should be
2189 sent to that database. Since the used "dbi" library can handle a wide variety
2190 of databases, the configuration is very generic. If in doubt, refer to libdbi's
2191 documentationE<nbsp>- we stick as close to the terminology used there.
2193 Each database needs a "name" as string argument in the starting tag of the
2194 block. This name will be used as "PluginInstance" in the values submitted to
2195 the daemon. Other than that, that name is not used.
2199 =item B<Interval> I<Interval>
2201 Sets the interval (in seconds) in which the values will be collected from this
2202 database. By default the global B<Interval> setting will be used.
2204 =item B<Driver> I<Driver>
2206 Specifies the driver to use to connect to the database. In many cases those
2207 drivers are named after the database they can connect to, but this is not a
2208 technical necessity. These drivers are sometimes referred to as "DBD",
2209 B<D>ataB<B>ase B<D>river, and some distributions ship them in separate
2210 packages. Drivers for the "dbi" library are developed by the B<libdbi-drivers>
2211 project at L<http://libdbi-drivers.sourceforge.net/>.
2213 You need to give the driver name as expected by the "dbi" library here. You
2214 should be able to find that in the documentation for each driver. If you
2215 mistype the driver name, the plugin will dump a list of all known driver names
2218 =item B<DriverOption> I<Key> I<Value>
2220 Sets driver-specific options. What option a driver supports can be found in the
2221 documentation for each driver, somewhere at
2222 L<http://libdbi-drivers.sourceforge.net/>. However, the options "host",
2223 "username", "password", and "dbname" seem to be deE<nbsp>facto standards.
2225 DBDs can register two types of options: String options and numeric options. The
2226 plugin will use the C<dbi_conn_set_option> function when the configuration
2227 provides a string and the C<dbi_conn_require_option_numeric> function when the
2228 configuration provides a number. So these two lines will actually result in
2229 different calls being used:
2231 DriverOption "Port" 1234 # numeric
2232 DriverOption "Port" "1234" # string
2234 Unfortunately, drivers are not too keen to report errors when an unknown option
2235 is passed to them, so invalid settings here may go unnoticed. This is not the
2236 plugin's fault, it will report errors if it gets them from the libraryE<nbsp>/
2237 the driver. If a driver complains about an option, the plugin will dump a
2238 complete list of all options understood by that driver to the log. There is no
2239 way to programmatically find out if an option expects a string or a numeric
2240 argument, so you will have to refer to the appropriate DBD's documentation to
2241 find this out. Sorry.
2243 =item B<SelectDB> I<Database>
2245 In some cases, the database name you connect with is not the database name you
2246 want to use for querying data. If this option is set, the plugin will "select"
2247 (switch to) that database after the connection is established.
2249 =item B<Query> I<QueryName>
2251 Associates the query named I<QueryName> with this database connection. The
2252 query needs to be defined I<before> this statement, i.E<nbsp>e. all query
2253 blocks you want to refer to must be placed above the database block you want to
2256 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
2258 Sets the B<host> field of I<value lists> to I<Hostname> when dispatching
2259 values. Defaults to the global hostname setting.
2267 =item B<Device> I<Device>
2269 Select partitions based on the devicename.
2271 =item B<MountPoint> I<Directory>
2273 Select partitions based on the mountpoint.
2275 =item B<FSType> I<FSType>
2277 Select partitions based on the filesystem type.
2279 =item B<IgnoreSelected> B<true>|B<false>
2281 Invert the selection: If set to true, all partitions B<except> the ones that
2282 match any one of the criteria are collected. By default only selected
2283 partitions are collected if a selection is made. If no selection is configured
2284 at all, B<all> partitions are selected.
2286 =item B<ReportByDevice> B<true>|B<false>
2288 Report using the device name rather than the mountpoint. i.e. with this I<false>,
2289 (the default), it will report a disk as "root", but with it I<true>, it will be
2290 "sda1" (or whichever).
2292 =item B<ReportInodes> B<true>|B<false>
2294 Enables or disables reporting of free, reserved and used inodes. Defaults to
2295 inode collection being disabled.
2297 Enable this option if inodes are a scarce resource for you, usually because
2298 many small files are stored on the disk. This is a usual scenario for mail
2299 transfer agents and web caches.
2301 =item B<ValuesAbsolute> B<true>|B<false>
2303 Enables or disables reporting of free and used disk space in 1K-blocks.
2304 Defaults to B<true>.
2306 =item B<ValuesPercentage> B<false>|B<true>
2308 Enables or disables reporting of free and used disk space in percentage.
2309 Defaults to B<false>.
2311 This is useful for deploying I<collectd> on the cloud, where machines with
2312 different disk size may exist. Then it is more practical to configure
2313 thresholds based on relative disk size.
2317 =head2 Plugin C<disk>
2319 The C<disk> plugin collects information about the usage of physical disks and
2320 logical disks (partitions). Values collected are the number of octets written
2321 to and read from a disk or partition, the number of read/write operations
2322 issued to the disk and a rather complex "time" it took for these commands to be
2325 Using the following two options you can ignore some disks or configure the
2326 collection only of specific disks.
2330 =item B<Disk> I<Name>
2332 Select the disk I<Name>. Whether it is collected or ignored depends on the
2333 B<IgnoreSelected> setting, see below. As with other plugins that use the
2334 daemon's ignorelist functionality, a string that starts and ends with a slash
2335 is interpreted as a regular expression. Examples:
2340 =item B<IgnoreSelected> B<true>|B<false>
2342 Sets whether selected disks, i.E<nbsp>e. the ones matches by any of the B<Disk>
2343 statements, are ignored or if all other disks are ignored. The behavior
2344 (hopefully) is intuitive: If no B<Disk> option is configured, all disks are
2345 collected. If at least one B<Disk> option is given and no B<IgnoreSelected> or
2346 set to B<false>, B<only> matching disks will be collected. If B<IgnoreSelected>
2347 is set to B<true>, all disks are collected B<except> the ones matched.
2349 =item B<UseBSDName> B<true>|B<false>
2351 Whether to use the device's "BSD Name", on MacE<nbsp>OSE<nbsp>X, instead of the
2352 default major/minor numbers. Requires collectd to be built with Apple's
2355 =item B<UdevNameAttr> I<Attribute>
2357 Attempt to override disk instance name with the value of a specified udev
2358 attribute when built with B<libudev>. If the attribute is not defined for the
2359 given device, the default name is used. Example:
2361 UdevNameAttr "DM_NAME"
2365 =head2 Plugin C<dns>
2369 =item B<Interface> I<Interface>
2371 The dns plugin uses B<libpcap> to capture dns traffic and analyzes it. This
2372 option sets the interface that should be used. If this option is not set, or
2373 set to "any", the plugin will try to get packets from B<all> interfaces. This
2374 may not work on certain platforms, such as MacE<nbsp>OSE<nbsp>X.
2376 =item B<IgnoreSource> I<IP-address>
2378 Ignore packets that originate from this address.
2380 =item B<SelectNumericQueryTypes> B<true>|B<false>
2382 Enabled by default, collects unknown (and thus presented as numeric only) query types.
2386 =head2 Plugin C<dpdkstat>
2388 The I<dpdkstat plugin> collects information about DPDK interfaces using the
2389 extended NIC stats API in DPDK.
2397 ProcessType "secondary"
2401 SharedMemObj "dpdk_collectd_stats_0"
2402 EnabledPortMask 0xffff
2403 PortName "interface1"
2404 PortName "interface2"
2409 =head3 The EAL block
2413 =item B<Coremask> I<Mask>
2415 A string containing an hexadecimal bit mask of the cores to run on. Note that
2416 core numbering can change between platforms and should be determined beforehand.
2418 =item B<Memorychannels> I<Channels>
2420 A string containing a number of memory channels per processor socket.
2422 =item B<ProcessType> I<type>
2424 A string containing the type of DPDK process instance.
2426 =item B<FilePrefix> I<File>
2428 The prefix text used for hugepage filenames. The filename will be set to
2429 /var/run/.<prefix>_config where prefix is what is passed in by the user.
2431 =item B<SocketMemory> I<MB>
2433 A string containing amount of Memory to allocate from hugepages on specific
2434 sockets in MB. This is an optional value.
2440 =item B<SharedMemObj> I<Mask>
2441 A string containing the name of the shared memory object that should be used to
2442 share stats from the DPDK secondary process to the collectd dpdkstat plugin.
2443 Defaults to dpdk_collectd_stats if no other value is configured.
2445 =item B<EnabledPortMask> I<Mask>
2447 A hexidecimal bit mask of the DPDK ports which should be enabled. A mask
2448 of 0x0 means that all ports will be disabled. A bitmask of all Fs means
2449 that all ports will be enabled. This is an optional argument - default
2450 is all ports enabled.
2452 =item B<PortName> I<Name>
2454 A string containing an optional name for the enabled DPDK ports. Each PortName
2455 option should contain only one port name; specify as many PortName options as
2456 desired. Default naming convention will be used if PortName is blank. If there
2457 are less PortName options than there are enabled ports, the default naming
2458 convention will be used for the additional ports.
2462 =head2 Plugin C<email>
2466 =item B<SocketFile> I<Path>
2468 Sets the socket-file which is to be created.
2470 =item B<SocketGroup> I<Group>
2472 If running as root change the group of the UNIX-socket after it has been
2473 created. Defaults to B<collectd>.
2475 =item B<SocketPerms> I<Permissions>
2477 Change the file permissions of the UNIX-socket after it has been created. The
2478 permissions must be given as a numeric, octal value as you would pass to
2479 L<chmod(1)>. Defaults to B<0770>.
2481 =item B<MaxConns> I<Number>
2483 Sets the maximum number of connections that can be handled in parallel. Since
2484 this many threads will be started immediately setting this to a very high
2485 value will waste valuable resources. Defaults to B<5> and will be forced to be
2486 at most B<16384> to prevent typos and dumb mistakes.
2490 =head2 Plugin C<ethstat>
2492 The I<ethstat plugin> collects information about network interface cards (NICs)
2493 by talking directly with the underlying kernel driver using L<ioctl(2)>.
2499 Map "rx_csum_offload_errors" "if_rx_errors" "checksum_offload"
2500 Map "multicast" "if_multicast"
2507 =item B<Interface> I<Name>
2509 Collect statistical information about interface I<Name>.
2511 =item B<Map> I<Name> I<Type> [I<TypeInstance>]
2513 By default, the plugin will submit values as type C<derive> and I<type
2514 instance> set to I<Name>, the name of the metric as reported by the driver. If
2515 an appropriate B<Map> option exists, the given I<Type> and, optionally,
2516 I<TypeInstance> will be used.
2518 =item B<MappedOnly> B<true>|B<false>
2520 When set to B<true>, only metrics that can be mapped to a I<type> will be
2521 collected, all other metrics will be ignored. Defaults to B<false>.
2525 =head2 Plugin C<exec>
2527 Please make sure to read L<collectd-exec(5)> before using this plugin. It
2528 contains valuable information on when the executable is executed and the
2529 output that is expected from it.
2533 =item B<Exec> I<User>[:[I<Group>]] I<Executable> [I<E<lt>argE<gt>> [I<E<lt>argE<gt>> ...]]
2535 =item B<NotificationExec> I<User>[:[I<Group>]] I<Executable> [I<E<lt>argE<gt>> [I<E<lt>argE<gt>> ...]]
2537 Execute the executable I<Executable> as user I<User>. If the user name is
2538 followed by a colon and a group name, the effective group is set to that group.
2539 The real group and saved-set group will be set to the default group of that
2540 user. If no group is given the effective group ID will be the same as the real
2543 Please note that in order to change the user and/or group the daemon needs
2544 superuser privileges. If the daemon is run as an unprivileged user you must
2545 specify the same user/group here. If the daemon is run with superuser
2546 privileges, you must supply a non-root user here.
2548 The executable may be followed by optional arguments that are passed to the
2549 program. Please note that due to the configuration parsing numbers and boolean
2550 values may be changed. If you want to be absolutely sure that something is
2551 passed as-is please enclose it in quotes.
2553 The B<Exec> and B<NotificationExec> statements change the semantics of the
2554 programs executed, i.E<nbsp>e. the data passed to them and the response
2555 expected from them. This is documented in great detail in L<collectd-exec(5)>.
2559 =head2 Plugin C<fhcount>
2561 The C<fhcount> plugin provides statistics about used, unused and total number of
2562 file handles on Linux.
2564 The I<fhcount plugin> provides the following configuration options:
2568 =item B<ValuesAbsolute> B<true>|B<false>
2570 Enables or disables reporting of file handles usage in absolute numbers,
2571 e.g. file handles used. Defaults to B<true>.
2573 =item B<ValuesPercentage> B<false>|B<true>
2575 Enables or disables reporting of file handles usage in percentages, e.g.
2576 percent of file handles used. Defaults to B<false>.
2580 =head2 Plugin C<filecount>
2582 The C<filecount> plugin counts the number of files in a certain directory (and
2583 its subdirectories) and their combined size. The configuration is very straight
2586 <Plugin "filecount">
2587 <Directory "/var/qmail/queue/mess">
2588 Instance "qmail-message"
2590 <Directory "/var/qmail/queue/todo">
2591 Instance "qmail-todo"
2593 <Directory "/var/lib/php5">
2594 Instance "php5-sessions"
2599 The example above counts the number of files in QMail's queue directories and
2600 the number of PHP5 sessions. Jfiy: The "todo" queue holds the messages that
2601 QMail has not yet looked at, the "message" queue holds the messages that were
2602 classified into "local" and "remote".
2604 As you can see, the configuration consists of one or more C<Directory> blocks,
2605 each of which specifies a directory in which to count the files. Within those
2606 blocks, the following options are recognized:
2610 =item B<Instance> I<Instance>
2612 Sets the plugin instance to I<Instance>. That instance name must be unique, but
2613 it's your responsibility, the plugin doesn't check for that. If not given, the
2614 instance is set to the directory name with all slashes replaced by underscores
2615 and all leading underscores removed.
2617 =item B<Name> I<Pattern>
2619 Only count files that match I<Pattern>, where I<Pattern> is a shell-like
2620 wildcard as understood by L<fnmatch(3)>. Only the B<filename> is checked
2621 against the pattern, not the entire path. In case this makes it easier for you:
2622 This option has been named after the B<-name> parameter to L<find(1)>.
2624 =item B<MTime> I<Age>
2626 Count only files of a specific age: If I<Age> is greater than zero, only files
2627 that haven't been touched in the last I<Age> seconds are counted. If I<Age> is
2628 a negative number, this is inversed. For example, if B<-60> is specified, only
2629 files that have been modified in the last minute will be counted.
2631 The number can also be followed by a "multiplier" to easily specify a larger
2632 timespan. When given in this notation, the argument must in quoted, i.E<nbsp>e.
2633 must be passed as string. So the B<-60> could also be written as B<"-1m"> (one
2634 minute). Valid multipliers are C<s> (second), C<m> (minute), C<h> (hour), C<d>
2635 (day), C<w> (week), and C<y> (year). There is no "month" multiplier. You can
2636 also specify fractional numbers, e.E<nbsp>g. B<"0.5d"> is identical to
2639 =item B<Size> I<Size>
2641 Count only files of a specific size. When I<Size> is a positive number, only
2642 files that are at least this big are counted. If I<Size> is a negative number,
2643 this is inversed, i.E<nbsp>e. only files smaller than the absolute value of
2644 I<Size> are counted.
2646 As with the B<MTime> option, a "multiplier" may be added. For a detailed
2647 description see above. Valid multipliers here are C<b> (byte), C<k> (kilobyte),
2648 C<m> (megabyte), C<g> (gigabyte), C<t> (terabyte), and C<p> (petabyte). Please
2649 note that there are 1000 bytes in a kilobyte, not 1024.
2651 =item B<Recursive> I<true>|I<false>
2653 Controls whether or not to recurse into subdirectories. Enabled by default.
2655 =item B<IncludeHidden> I<true>|I<false>
2657 Controls whether or not to include "hidden" files and directories in the count.
2658 "Hidden" files and directories are those, whose name begins with a dot.
2659 Defaults to I<false>, i.e. by default hidden files and directories are ignored.
2663 =head2 Plugin C<GenericJMX>
2665 The I<GenericJMX plugin> is written in I<Java> and therefore documented in
2666 L<collectd-java(5)>.
2668 =head2 Plugin C<gmond>
2670 The I<gmond> plugin received the multicast traffic sent by B<gmond>, the
2671 statistics collection daemon of Ganglia. Mappings for the standard "metrics"
2672 are built-in, custom mappings may be added via B<Metric> blocks, see below.
2677 MCReceiveFrom "239.2.11.71" "8649"
2678 <Metric "swap_total">
2680 TypeInstance "total"
2683 <Metric "swap_free">
2690 The following metrics are built-in:
2696 load_one, load_five, load_fifteen
2700 cpu_user, cpu_system, cpu_idle, cpu_nice, cpu_wio
2704 mem_free, mem_shared, mem_buffers, mem_cached, mem_total
2716 Available configuration options:
2720 =item B<MCReceiveFrom> I<MCGroup> [I<Port>]
2722 Sets sets the multicast group and UDP port to which to subscribe.
2724 Default: B<239.2.11.71>E<nbsp>/E<nbsp>B<8649>
2726 =item E<lt>B<Metric> I<Name>E<gt>
2728 These blocks add a new metric conversion to the internal table. I<Name>, the
2729 string argument to the B<Metric> block, is the metric name as used by Ganglia.
2733 =item B<Type> I<Type>
2735 Type to map this metric to. Required.
2737 =item B<TypeInstance> I<Instance>
2739 Type-instance to use. Optional.
2741 =item B<DataSource> I<Name>
2743 Data source to map this metric to. If the configured type has exactly one data
2744 source, this is optional. Otherwise the option is required.
2750 =head2 Plugin C<gps>
2752 The C<gps plugin> connects to gpsd on the host machine.
2753 The host, port, timeout and pause are configurable.
2755 This is useful if you run an NTP server using a GPS for source and you want to
2758 Mind your GPS must send $--GSA for having the data reported!
2760 The following elements are collected:
2766 Number of satellites used for fix (type instance "used") and in view (type
2767 instance "visible"). 0 means no GPS satellites are visible.
2769 =item B<dilution_of_precision>
2771 Vertical and horizontal dilution (type instance "horizontal" or "vertical").
2772 It should be between 0 and 3.
2773 Look at the documentation of your GPS to know more.
2781 # Connect to localhost on gpsd regular port:
2786 # PauseConnect of 5 sec. between connection attempts.
2790 Available configuration options:
2794 =item B<Host> I<Host>
2796 The host on which gpsd daemon runs. Defaults to B<localhost>.
2798 =item B<Port> I<Port>
2800 Port to connect to gpsd on the host machine. Defaults to B<2947>.
2802 =item B<Timeout> I<Seconds>
2804 Timeout in seconds (default 0.015 sec).
2806 The GPS data stream is fetch by the plugin form the daemon.
2807 It waits for data to be available, if none arrives it times out
2808 and loop for another reading.
2809 Mind to put a low value gpsd expects value in the micro-seconds area
2810 (recommended is 500 us) since the waiting function is blocking.
2811 Value must be between 500 us and 5 sec., if outside that range the
2812 default value is applied.
2814 This only applies from gpsd release-2.95.
2816 =item B<PauseConnect> I<Seconds>
2818 Pause to apply between attempts of connection to gpsd in seconds (default 5 sec).
2822 =head2 Plugin C<grpc>
2824 The I<grpc> plugin provides an RPC interface to submit values to or query
2825 values from collectd based on the open source gRPC framework. It exposes an
2826 end-point for dispatching values to the daemon.
2828 The B<gRPC> homepage can be found at L<https://grpc.io/>.
2832 =item B<Server> I<Host> I<Port>
2834 The B<Server> statement sets the address of a server to which to send metrics
2835 via the C<DispatchValues> function.
2837 The argument I<Host> may be a hostname, an IPv4 address, or an IPv6 address.
2839 Optionally, B<Server> may be specified as a configuration block which supports
2840 the following options:
2844 =item B<EnableSSL> B<false>|B<true>
2846 Whether to require SSL for outgoing connections. Default: false.
2848 =item B<SSLCACertificateFile> I<Filename>
2850 =item B<SSLCertificateFile> I<Filename>
2852 =item B<SSLCertificateKeyFile> I<Filename>
2854 Filenames specifying SSL certificate and key material to be used with SSL
2859 =item B<Listen> I<Host> I<Port>
2861 The B<Listen> statement sets the network address to bind to. When multiple
2862 statements are specified, the daemon will bind to all of them. If none are
2863 specified, it defaults to B<0.0.0.0:50051>.
2865 The argument I<Host> may be a hostname, an IPv4 address, or an IPv6 address.
2867 Optionally, B<Listen> may be specified as a configuration block which
2868 supports the following options:
2872 =item B<EnableSSL> I<true>|I<false>
2874 Whether to enable SSL for incoming connections. Default: false.
2876 =item B<SSLCACertificateFile> I<Filename>
2878 =item B<SSLCertificateFile> I<Filename>
2880 =item B<SSLCertificateKeyFile> I<Filename>
2882 Filenames specifying SSL certificate and key material to be used with SSL
2889 =head2 Plugin C<hddtemp>
2891 To get values from B<hddtemp> collectd connects to B<localhost> (127.0.0.1),
2892 port B<7634/tcp>. The B<Host> and B<Port> options can be used to change these
2893 default values, see below. C<hddtemp> has to be running to work correctly. If
2894 C<hddtemp> is not running timeouts may appear which may interfere with other
2897 The B<hddtemp> homepage can be found at
2898 L<http://www.guzu.net/linux/hddtemp.php>.
2902 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
2904 Hostname to connect to. Defaults to B<127.0.0.1>.
2906 =item B<Port> I<Port>
2908 TCP-Port to connect to. Defaults to B<7634>.
2912 =head2 Plugin C<hugepages>
2914 To collect B<hugepages> information, collectd reads directories
2915 "/sys/devices/system/node/*/hugepages" and
2916 "/sys/kernel/mm/hugepages".
2917 Reading of these directories can be disabled by the following
2918 options (default is enabled).
2922 =item B<ReportPerNodeHP> B<true>|B<false>
2924 If enabled, information will be collected from the hugepage
2925 counters in "/sys/devices/system/node/*/hugepages".
2926 This is used to check the per-node hugepage statistics on
2929 =item B<ReportRootHP> B<true>|B<false>
2931 If enabled, information will be collected from the hugepage
2932 counters in "/sys/kernel/mm/hugepages".
2933 This can be used on both NUMA and non-NUMA systems to check
2934 the overall hugepage statistics.
2936 =item B<ValuesPages> B<true>|B<false>
2938 Whether to report hugepages metrics in number of pages.
2939 Defaults to B<true>.
2941 =item B<ValuesBytes> B<false>|B<true>
2943 Whether to report hugepages metrics in bytes.
2944 Defaults to B<false>.
2946 =item B<ValuesPercentage> B<false>|B<true>
2948 Whether to report hugepages metrics as percentage.
2949 Defaults to B<false>.
2953 =head2 Plugin C<intel_rdt>
2955 The I<intel_rdt> plugin collects information provided by monitoring features of
2956 Intel Resource Director Technology (Intel(R) RDT) like Cache Monitoring
2957 Technology (CMT), Memory Bandwidth Monitoring (MBM). These features provide
2958 information about utilization of shared resources. CMT monitors last level cache
2959 occupancy (LLC). MBM supports two types of events reporting local and remote
2960 memory bandwidth. Local memory bandwidth (MBL) reports the bandwidth of
2961 accessing memory associated with the local socket. Remote memory bandwidth (MBR)
2962 reports the bandwidth of accessing the remote socket. Also this technology
2963 allows to monitor instructions per clock (IPC).
2964 Monitor events are hardware dependant. Monitoring capabilities are detected on
2965 plugin initialization and only supported events are monitored.
2967 B<Note:> I<intel_rdt> plugin is using model-specific registers (MSRs), which
2968 require an additional capability to be enabled if collectd is run as a service.
2969 Please refer to I<contrib/systemd.collectd.service> file for more details.
2973 <Plugin "intel_rdt">
2974 Cores "0-2" "3,4,6" "8-10,15"
2981 =item B<Interval> I<seconds>
2983 The interval within which to retrieve statistics on monitored events in seconds.
2984 For milliseconds divide the time by 1000 for example if the desired interval
2985 is 50ms, set interval to 0.05. Due to limited capacity of counters it is not
2986 recommended to set interval higher than 1 sec.
2988 =item B<Cores> I<cores groups>
2990 All events are reported on a per core basis. Monitoring of the events can be
2991 configured for group of cores (aggregated statistics). This field defines groups
2992 of cores on which to monitor supported events. The field is represented as list
2993 of strings with core group values. Each string represents a list of cores in a
2994 group. Allowed formats are:
2999 If an empty string is provided as value for this field default cores
3000 configuration is applied - a separate group is created for each core.
3004 B<Note:> By default global interval is used to retrieve statistics on monitored
3005 events. To configure a plugin specific interval use B<Interval> option of the
3006 intel_rdt <LoadPlugin> block. For milliseconds divide the time by 1000 for
3007 example if the desired interval is 50ms, set interval to 0.05.
3008 Due to limited capacity of counters it is not recommended to set interval higher
3011 =head2 Plugin C<interface>
3015 =item B<Interface> I<Interface>
3017 Select this interface. By default these interfaces will then be collected. For
3018 a more detailed description see B<IgnoreSelected> below.
3020 =item B<IgnoreSelected> I<true>|I<false>
3022 If no configuration if given, the B<interface>-plugin will collect data from
3023 all interfaces. This may not be practical, especially for loopback- and
3024 similar interfaces. Thus, you can use the B<Interface>-option to pick the
3025 interfaces you're interested in. Sometimes, however, it's easier/preferred
3026 to collect all interfaces I<except> a few ones. This option enables you to
3027 do that: By setting B<IgnoreSelected> to I<true> the effect of
3028 B<Interface> is inverted: All selected interfaces are ignored and all
3029 other interfaces are collected.
3031 It is possible to use regular expressions to match interface names, if the
3032 name is surrounded by I</.../> and collectd was compiled with support for
3033 regexps. This is useful if there's a need to collect (or ignore) data
3034 for a group of interfaces that are similarly named, without the need to
3035 explicitly list all of them (especially useful if the list is dynamic).
3040 Interface "/^tun[0-9]+/"
3041 IgnoreSelected "true"
3043 This will ignore the loopback interface, all interfaces with names starting
3044 with I<veth> and all interfaces with names starting with I<tun> followed by
3047 =item B<ReportInactive> I<true>|I<false>
3049 When set to I<false>, only interfaces with non-zero traffic will be
3050 reported. Note that the check is done by looking into whether a
3051 package was sent at any time from boot and the corresponding counter
3052 is non-zero. So, if the interface has been sending data in the past
3053 since boot, but not during the reported time-interval, it will still
3056 The default value is I<true> and results in collection of the data
3057 from all interfaces that are selected by B<Interface> and
3058 B<IgnoreSelected> options.
3060 =item B<UniqueName> I<true>|I<false>
3062 Interface name is not unique on Solaris (KSTAT), interface name is unique
3063 only within a module/instance. Following tuple is considered unique:
3064 (ks_module, ks_instance, ks_name)
3065 If this option is set to true, interface name contains above three fields
3066 separated by an underscore. For more info on KSTAT, visit
3067 L<http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E23824_01/html/821-1468/kstat-3kstat.html#REFMAN3Ekstat-3kstat>
3069 This option is only available on Solaris.
3073 =head2 Plugin C<ipmi>
3077 =item B<Sensor> I<Sensor>
3079 Selects sensors to collect or to ignore, depending on B<IgnoreSelected>.
3081 =item B<IgnoreSelected> I<true>|I<false>
3083 If no configuration if given, the B<ipmi> plugin will collect data from all
3084 sensors found of type "temperature", "voltage", "current" and "fanspeed".
3085 This option enables you to do that: By setting B<IgnoreSelected> to I<true>
3086 the effect of B<Sensor> is inverted: All selected sensors are ignored and
3087 all other sensors are collected.
3089 =item B<NotifySensorAdd> I<true>|I<false>
3091 If a sensor appears after initialization time of a minute a notification
3094 =item B<NotifySensorRemove> I<true>|I<false>
3096 If a sensor disappears a notification is sent.
3098 =item B<NotifySensorNotPresent> I<true>|I<false>
3100 If you have for example dual power supply and one of them is (un)plugged then
3101 a notification is sent.
3105 =head2 Plugin C<iptables>
3109 =item B<Chain> I<Table> I<Chain> [I<Comment|Number> [I<Name>]]
3111 =item B<Chain6> I<Table> I<Chain> [I<Comment|Number> [I<Name>]]
3113 Select the iptables/ip6tables filter rules to count packets and bytes from.
3115 If only I<Table> and I<Chain> are given, this plugin will collect the counters
3116 of all rules which have a comment-match. The comment is then used as
3119 If I<Comment> or I<Number> is given, only the rule with the matching comment or
3120 the I<n>th rule will be collected. Again, the comment (or the number) will be
3121 used as the type-instance.
3123 If I<Name> is supplied, it will be used as the type-instance instead of the
3124 comment or the number.
3128 =head2 Plugin C<irq>
3134 Select this irq. By default these irqs will then be collected. For a more
3135 detailed description see B<IgnoreSelected> below.
3137 =item B<IgnoreSelected> I<true>|I<false>
3139 If no configuration if given, the B<irq>-plugin will collect data from all
3140 irqs. This may not be practical, especially if no interrupts happen. Thus, you
3141 can use the B<Irq>-option to pick the interrupt you're interested in.
3142 Sometimes, however, it's easier/preferred to collect all interrupts I<except> a
3143 few ones. This option enables you to do that: By setting B<IgnoreSelected> to
3144 I<true> the effect of B<Irq> is inverted: All selected interrupts are ignored
3145 and all other interrupts are collected.
3149 =head2 Plugin C<java>
3151 The I<Java> plugin makes it possible to write extensions for collectd in Java.
3152 This section only discusses the syntax and semantic of the configuration
3153 options. For more in-depth information on the I<Java> plugin, please read
3154 L<collectd-java(5)>.
3159 JVMArg "-verbose:jni"
3160 JVMArg "-Djava.class.path=/opt/collectd/lib/collectd/bindings/java"
3161 LoadPlugin "org.collectd.java.Foobar"
3162 <Plugin "org.collectd.java.Foobar">
3163 # To be parsed by the plugin
3167 Available configuration options:
3171 =item B<JVMArg> I<Argument>
3173 Argument that is to be passed to the I<Java Virtual Machine> (JVM). This works
3174 exactly the way the arguments to the I<java> binary on the command line work.
3175 Execute C<javaE<nbsp>--help> for details.
3177 Please note that B<all> these options must appear B<before> (i.E<nbsp>e. above)
3178 any other options! When another option is found, the JVM will be started and
3179 later options will have to be ignored!
3181 =item B<LoadPlugin> I<JavaClass>
3183 Instantiates a new I<JavaClass> object. The constructor of this object very
3184 likely then registers one or more callback methods with the server.
3186 See L<collectd-java(5)> for details.
3188 When the first such option is found, the virtual machine (JVM) is created. This
3189 means that all B<JVMArg> options must appear before (i.E<nbsp>e. above) all
3190 B<LoadPlugin> options!
3192 =item B<Plugin> I<Name>
3194 The entire block is passed to the Java plugin as an
3195 I<org.collectd.api.OConfigItem> object.
3197 For this to work, the plugin has to register a configuration callback first,
3198 see L<collectd-java(5)/"config callback">. This means, that the B<Plugin> block
3199 must appear after the appropriate B<LoadPlugin> block. Also note, that I<Name>
3200 depends on the (Java) plugin registering the callback and is completely
3201 independent from the I<JavaClass> argument passed to B<LoadPlugin>.
3205 =head2 Plugin C<load>
3207 The I<Load plugin> collects the system load. These numbers give a rough overview
3208 over the utilization of a machine. The system load is defined as the number of
3209 runnable tasks in the run-queue and is provided by many operating systems as a
3210 one, five or fifteen minute average.
3212 The following configuration options are available:
3216 =item B<ReportRelative> B<false>|B<true>
3218 When enabled, system load divided by number of available CPU cores is reported
3219 for intervals 1 min, 5 min and 15 min. Defaults to false.
3224 =head2 Plugin C<logfile>
3228 =item B<LogLevel> B<debug|info|notice|warning|err>
3230 Sets the log-level. If, for example, set to B<notice>, then all events with
3231 severity B<notice>, B<warning>, or B<err> will be written to the logfile.
3233 Please note that B<debug> is only available if collectd has been compiled with
3236 =item B<File> I<File>
3238 Sets the file to write log messages to. The special strings B<stdout> and
3239 B<stderr> can be used to write to the standard output and standard error
3240 channels, respectively. This, of course, only makes much sense when I<collectd>
3241 is running in foreground- or non-daemon-mode.
3243 =item B<Timestamp> B<true>|B<false>
3245 Prefix all lines printed by the current time. Defaults to B<true>.
3247 =item B<PrintSeverity> B<true>|B<false>
3249 When enabled, all lines are prefixed by the severity of the log message, for
3250 example "warning". Defaults to B<false>.
3254 B<Note>: There is no need to notify the daemon after moving or removing the
3255 log file (e.E<nbsp>g. when rotating the logs). The plugin reopens the file
3256 for each line it writes.
3258 =head2 Plugin C<log_logstash>
3260 The I<log logstash plugin> behaves like the logfile plugin but formats
3261 messages as JSON events for logstash to parse and input.
3265 =item B<LogLevel> B<debug|info|notice|warning|err>
3267 Sets the log-level. If, for example, set to B<notice>, then all events with
3268 severity B<notice>, B<warning>, or B<err> will be written to the logfile.
3270 Please note that B<debug> is only available if collectd has been compiled with
3273 =item B<File> I<File>
3275 Sets the file to write log messages to. The special strings B<stdout> and
3276 B<stderr> can be used to write to the standard output and standard error
3277 channels, respectively. This, of course, only makes much sense when I<collectd>
3278 is running in foreground- or non-daemon-mode.
3282 B<Note>: There is no need to notify the daemon after moving or removing the
3283 log file (e.E<nbsp>g. when rotating the logs). The plugin reopens the file
3284 for each line it writes.
3286 =head2 Plugin C<lpar>
3288 The I<LPAR plugin> reads CPU statistics of I<Logical Partitions>, a
3289 virtualization technique for IBM POWER processors. It takes into account CPU
3290 time stolen from or donated to a partition, in addition to the usual user,
3291 system, I/O statistics.
3293 The following configuration options are available:
3297 =item B<CpuPoolStats> B<false>|B<true>
3299 When enabled, statistics about the processor pool are read, too. The partition
3300 needs to have pool authority in order to be able to acquire this information.
3303 =item B<ReportBySerial> B<false>|B<true>
3305 If enabled, the serial of the physical machine the partition is currently
3306 running on is reported as I<hostname> and the logical hostname of the machine
3307 is reported in the I<plugin instance>. Otherwise, the logical hostname will be
3308 used (just like other plugins) and the I<plugin instance> will be empty.
3313 =head2 Plugin C<lua>
3315 This plugin embeds a Lua interpreter into collectd and provides an interface
3316 to collectd's plugin system. See L<collectd-lua(5)> for its documentation.
3319 =head2 Plugin C<mbmon>
3321 The C<mbmon plugin> uses mbmon to retrieve temperature, voltage, etc.
3323 Be default collectd connects to B<localhost> (127.0.0.1), port B<411/tcp>. The
3324 B<Host> and B<Port> options can be used to change these values, see below.
3325 C<mbmon> has to be running to work correctly. If C<mbmon> is not running
3326 timeouts may appear which may interfere with other statistics..
3328 C<mbmon> must be run with the -r option ("print TAG and Value format");
3329 Debian's F</etc/init.d/mbmon> script already does this, other people
3330 will need to ensure that this is the case.
3334 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
3336 Hostname to connect to. Defaults to B<127.0.0.1>.
3338 =item B<Port> I<Port>
3340 TCP-Port to connect to. Defaults to B<411>.
3344 =head2 Plugin C<mcelog>
3346 The C<mcelog plugin> uses mcelog to retrieve machine check exceptions.
3348 By default the plugin connects to B<"/var/run/mcelog-client"> to check if the
3349 mcelog server is running. When the server is running, the plugin will tail the
3350 specified logfile to retrieve machine check exception information and send a
3351 notification with the details from the logfile. The plugin will use the mcelog
3352 client protocol to retrieve memory related machine check exceptions.
3356 =item B<McelogClientSocket> I<Path>
3357 Connect to the mcelog client socket using the UNIX domain socket at I<Path>.
3358 Defaults to B<"/var/run/mcelog-client">.
3360 =item B<McelogLogfile> I<Path>
3362 The mcelog file to parse. Defaults to B<"/var/log/mcelog">.
3368 The C<md plugin> collects information from Linux Software-RAID devices (md).
3370 All reported values are of the type C<md_disks>. Reported type instances are
3371 I<active>, I<failed> (present but not operational), I<spare> (hot stand-by) and
3372 I<missing> (physically absent) disks.
3376 =item B<Device> I<Device>
3378 Select md devices based on device name. The I<device name> is the basename of
3379 the device, i.e. the name of the block device without the leading C</dev/>.
3380 See B<IgnoreSelected> for more details.
3382 =item B<IgnoreSelected> B<true>|B<false>
3384 Invert device selection: If set to B<true>, all md devices B<except> those
3385 listed using B<Device> are collected. If B<false> (the default), only those
3386 listed are collected. If no configuration is given, the B<md> plugin will
3387 collect data from all md devices.
3391 =head2 Plugin C<memcachec>
3393 The C<memcachec plugin> connects to a memcached server, queries one or more
3394 given I<pages> and parses the returned data according to user specification.
3395 The I<matches> used are the same as the matches used in the C<curl> and C<tail>
3398 In order to talk to the memcached server, this plugin uses the I<libmemcached>
3399 library. Please note that there is another library with a very similar name,
3400 libmemcache (notice the missing `d'), which is not applicable.
3402 Synopsis of the configuration:
3404 <Plugin "memcachec">
3405 <Page "plugin_instance">
3409 Regex "(\\d+) bytes sent"
3412 Instance "type_instance"
3417 The configuration options are:
3421 =item E<lt>B<Page> I<Name>E<gt>
3423 Each B<Page> block defines one I<page> to be queried from the memcached server.
3424 The block requires one string argument which is used as I<plugin instance>.
3426 =item B<Server> I<Address>
3428 Sets the server address to connect to when querying the page. Must be inside a
3433 When connected to the memcached server, asks for the page I<Key>.
3435 =item E<lt>B<Match>E<gt>
3437 Match blocks define which strings to look for and how matches substrings are
3438 interpreted. For a description of match blocks, please see L<"Plugin tail">.
3442 =head2 Plugin C<memcached>
3444 The B<memcached plugin> connects to a memcached server and queries statistics
3445 about cache utilization, memory and bandwidth used.
3446 L<http://memcached.org/>
3448 <Plugin "memcached">
3450 #Host "memcache.example.com"
3456 The plugin configuration consists of one or more B<Instance> blocks which
3457 specify one I<memcached> connection each. Within the B<Instance> blocks, the
3458 following options are allowed:
3462 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
3464 Sets the B<host> field of dispatched values. Defaults to the global hostname
3466 For backwards compatibility, values are also dispatched with the global
3467 hostname when B<Host> is set to B<127.0.0.1> or B<localhost> and B<Address> is
3470 =item B<Address> I<Address>
3472 Hostname or IP to connect to. For backwards compatibility, defaults to the
3473 value of B<Host> or B<127.0.0.1> if B<Host> is unset.
3475 =item B<Port> I<Port>
3477 TCP port to connect to. Defaults to B<11211>.
3479 =item B<Socket> I<Path>
3481 Connect to I<memcached> using the UNIX domain socket at I<Path>. If this
3482 setting is given, the B<Address> and B<Port> settings are ignored.
3486 =head2 Plugin C<mic>
3488 The B<mic plugin> gathers CPU statistics, memory usage and temperatures from
3489 Intel's Many Integrated Core (MIC) systems.
3498 ShowTemperatures true
3501 IgnoreSelectedTemperature true
3506 IgnoreSelectedPower true
3509 The following options are valid inside the B<PluginE<nbsp>mic> block:
3513 =item B<ShowCPU> B<true>|B<false>
3515 If enabled (the default) a sum of the CPU usage across all cores is reported.
3517 =item B<ShowCPUCores> B<true>|B<false>
3519 If enabled (the default) per-core CPU usage is reported.
3521 =item B<ShowMemory> B<true>|B<false>
3523 If enabled (the default) the physical memory usage of the MIC system is
3526 =item B<ShowTemperatures> B<true>|B<false>
3528 If enabled (the default) various temperatures of the MIC system are reported.
3530 =item B<Temperature> I<Name>
3532 This option controls which temperatures are being reported. Whether matching
3533 temperatures are being ignored or I<only> matching temperatures are reported
3534 depends on the B<IgnoreSelectedTemperature> setting below. By default I<all>
3535 temperatures are reported.
3537 =item B<IgnoreSelectedTemperature> B<false>|B<true>
3539 Controls the behavior of the B<Temperature> setting above. If set to B<false>
3540 (the default) only temperatures matching a B<Temperature> option are reported
3541 or, if no B<Temperature> option is specified, all temperatures are reported. If
3542 set to B<true>, matching temperatures are I<ignored> and all other temperatures
3545 Known temperature names are:
3579 =item B<ShowPower> B<true>|B<false>
3581 If enabled (the default) various temperatures of the MIC system are reported.
3583 =item B<Power> I<Name>
3585 This option controls which power readings are being reported. Whether matching
3586 power readings are being ignored or I<only> matching power readings are reported
3587 depends on the B<IgnoreSelectedPower> setting below. By default I<all>
3588 power readings are reported.
3590 =item B<IgnoreSelectedPower> B<false>|B<true>
3592 Controls the behavior of the B<Power> setting above. If set to B<false>
3593 (the default) only power readings matching a B<Power> option are reported
3594 or, if no B<Power> option is specified, all power readings are reported. If
3595 set to B<true>, matching power readings are I<ignored> and all other power readings
3598 Known power names are:
3604 Total power utilization averaged over Time Window 0 (uWatts).
3608 Total power utilization averaged over Time Window 0 (uWatts).
3612 Instantaneous power (uWatts).
3616 Max instantaneous power (uWatts).
3620 PCI-E connector power (uWatts).
3624 2x3 connector power (uWatts).
3628 2x4 connector power (uWatts).
3636 Uncore rail (uVolts).
3640 Memory subsystem rail (uVolts).
3646 =head2 Plugin C<memory>
3648 The I<memory plugin> provides the following configuration options:
3652 =item B<ValuesAbsolute> B<true>|B<false>
3654 Enables or disables reporting of physical memory usage in absolute numbers,
3655 i.e. bytes. Defaults to B<true>.
3657 =item B<ValuesPercentage> B<false>|B<true>
3659 Enables or disables reporting of physical memory usage in percentages, e.g.
3660 percent of physical memory used. Defaults to B<false>.
3662 This is useful for deploying I<collectd> in a heterogeneous environment in
3663 which the sizes of physical memory vary.
3667 =head2 Plugin C<modbus>
3669 The B<modbus plugin> connects to a Modbus "slave" via Modbus/TCP or Modbus/RTU and
3670 reads register values. It supports reading single registers (unsigned 16E<nbsp>bit
3671 values), large integer values (unsigned 32E<nbsp>bit values) and floating point
3672 values (two registers interpreted as IEEE floats in big endian notation).
3676 <Data "voltage-input-1">
3679 RegisterCmd ReadHolding
3684 <Data "voltage-input-2">
3687 RegisterCmd ReadHolding
3692 <Data "supply-temperature-1">
3695 RegisterCmd ReadHolding
3700 <Host "modbus.example.com">
3701 Address "192.168.0.42"
3706 Instance "power-supply"
3707 Collect "voltage-input-1"
3708 Collect "voltage-input-2"
3713 Device "/dev/ttyUSB0"
3718 Instance "temperature"
3719 Collect "supply-temperature-1"
3725 =item E<lt>B<Data> I<Name>E<gt> blocks
3727 Data blocks define a mapping between register numbers and the "types" used by
3730 Within E<lt>DataE<nbsp>/E<gt> blocks, the following options are allowed:
3734 =item B<RegisterBase> I<Number>
3736 Configures the base register to read from the device. If the option
3737 B<RegisterType> has been set to B<Uint32> or B<Float>, this and the next
3738 register will be read (the register number is increased by one).
3740 =item B<RegisterType> B<Int16>|B<Int32>|B<Uint16>|B<Uint32>|B<Float>
3742 Specifies what kind of data is returned by the device. If the type is B<Int32>,
3743 B<Uint32> or B<Float>, two 16E<nbsp>bit registers will be read and the data is
3744 combined into one value. Defaults to B<Uint16>.
3746 =item B<RegisterCmd> B<ReadHolding>|B<ReadInput>
3748 Specifies register type to be collected from device. Works only with libmodbus
3749 2.9.2 or higher. Defaults to B<ReadHolding>.
3751 =item B<Type> I<Type>
3753 Specifies the "type" (data set) to use when dispatching the value to
3754 I<collectd>. Currently, only data sets with exactly one data source are
3757 =item B<Instance> I<Instance>
3759 Sets the type instance to use when dispatching the value to I<collectd>. If
3760 unset, an empty string (no type instance) is used.
3764 =item E<lt>B<Host> I<Name>E<gt> blocks
3766 Host blocks are used to specify to which hosts to connect and what data to read
3767 from their "slaves". The string argument I<Name> is used as hostname when
3768 dispatching the values to I<collectd>.
3770 Within E<lt>HostE<nbsp>/E<gt> blocks, the following options are allowed:
3774 =item B<Address> I<Hostname>
3776 For Modbus/TCP, specifies the node name (the actual network address) used to
3777 connect to the host. This may be an IP address or a hostname. Please note that
3778 the used I<libmodbus> library only supports IPv4 at the moment.
3780 =item B<Port> I<Service>
3782 for Modbus/TCP, specifies the port used to connect to the host. The port can
3783 either be given as a number or as a service name. Please note that the
3784 I<Service> argument must be a string, even if ports are given in their numerical
3785 form. Defaults to "502".
3787 =item B<Device> I<Devicenode>
3789 For Modbus/RTU, specifies the path to the serial device being used.
3791 =item B<Baudrate> I<Baudrate>
3793 For Modbus/RTU, specifies the baud rate of the serial device.
3794 Note, connections currently support only 8/N/1.
3796 =item B<Interval> I<Interval>
3798 Sets the interval (in seconds) in which the values will be collected from this
3799 host. By default the global B<Interval> setting will be used.
3801 =item E<lt>B<Slave> I<ID>E<gt>
3803 Over each connection, multiple Modbus devices may be reached. The slave ID
3804 is used to specify which device should be addressed. For each device you want
3805 to query, one B<Slave> block must be given.
3807 Within E<lt>SlaveE<nbsp>/E<gt> blocks, the following options are allowed:
3811 =item B<Instance> I<Instance>
3813 Specify the plugin instance to use when dispatching the values to I<collectd>.
3814 By default "slave_I<ID>" is used.
3816 =item B<Collect> I<DataName>
3818 Specifies which data to retrieve from the device. I<DataName> must be the same
3819 string as the I<Name> argument passed to a B<Data> block. You can specify this
3820 option multiple times to collect more than one value from a slave. At least one
3821 B<Collect> option is mandatory.
3829 =head2 Plugin C<mqtt>
3831 The I<MQTT plugin> can send metrics to MQTT (B<Publish> blocks) and receive
3832 values from MQTT (B<Subscribe> blocks).
3838 Host "mqtt.example.com"
3842 Host "mqtt.example.com"
3847 The plugin's configuration is in B<Publish> and/or B<Subscribe> blocks,
3848 configuring the sending and receiving direction respectively. The plugin will
3849 register a write callback named C<mqtt/I<name>> where I<name> is the string
3850 argument given to the B<Publish> block. Both types of blocks share many but not
3851 all of the following options. If an option is valid in only one of the blocks,
3852 it will be mentioned explicitly.
3858 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
3860 Hostname of the MQTT broker to connect to.
3862 =item B<Port> I<Service>
3864 Port number or service name of the MQTT broker to connect to.
3866 =item B<User> I<UserName>
3868 Username used when authenticating to the MQTT broker.
3870 =item B<Password> I<Password>
3872 Password used when authenticating to the MQTT broker.
3874 =item B<ClientId> I<ClientId>
3876 MQTT client ID to use. Defaults to the hostname used by I<collectd>.
3878 =item B<QoS> [B<0>-B<2>]
3880 Sets the I<Quality of Service>, with the values C<0>, C<1> and C<2> meaning:
3898 In B<Publish> blocks, this option determines the QoS flag set on outgoing
3899 messages and defaults to B<0>. In B<Subscribe> blocks, determines the maximum
3900 QoS setting the client is going to accept and defaults to B<2>. If the QoS flag
3901 on a message is larger than the maximum accepted QoS of a subscriber, the
3902 message's QoS will be downgraded.
3904 =item B<Prefix> I<Prefix> (Publish only)
3906 This plugin will use one topic per I<value list> which will looks like a path.
3907 I<Prefix> is used as the first path element and defaults to B<collectd>.
3909 An example topic name would be:
3911 collectd/cpu-0/cpu-user
3913 =item B<Retain> B<false>|B<true> (Publish only)
3915 Controls whether the MQTT broker will retain (keep a copy of) the last message
3916 sent to each topic and deliver it to new subscribers. Defaults to B<false>.
3918 =item B<StoreRates> B<true>|B<false> (Publish only)
3920 Controls whether C<DERIVE> and C<COUNTER> metrics are converted to a I<rate>
3921 before sending. Defaults to B<true>.
3923 =item B<CleanSession> B<true>|B<false> (Subscribe only)
3925 Controls whether the MQTT "cleans" the session up after the subscriber
3926 disconnects or if it maintains the subscriber's subscriptions and all messages
3927 that arrive while the subscriber is disconnected. Defaults to B<true>.
3929 =item B<Topic> I<TopicName> (Subscribe only)
3931 Configures the topic(s) to subscribe to. You can use the single level C<+> and
3932 multi level C<#> wildcards. Defaults to B<collectd/#>, i.e. all topics beneath
3933 the B<collectd> branch.
3935 =item B<CACert> I<file>
3937 Path to the PEM-encoded CA certificate file. Setting this option enables TLS
3938 communication with the MQTT broker, and as such, B<Port> should be the TLS-enabled
3939 port of the MQTT broker.
3940 A valid TLS configuration requires B<CACert>, B<CertificateFile> and B<CertificateKeyFile>.
3942 =item B<CertificateFile> I<file>
3944 Path to the PEM-encoded certificate file to use as client certificate when
3945 connecting to the MQTT broker.
3946 A valid TLS configuration requires B<CACert>, B<CertificateFile> and B<CertificateKeyFile>.
3948 =item B<CertificateKeyFile> I<file>
3950 Path to the unencrypted PEM-encoded key file corresponding to B<CertificateFile>.
3951 A valid TLS configuration requires B<CACert>, B<CertificateFile> and B<CertificateKeyFile>.
3953 =item B<TLSProtocol> I<protocol>
3955 If configured, this specifies the string protocol version (e.g. C<tlsv1>,
3956 C<tlsv1.2>) to use for the TLS connection to the broker. If not set a default
3957 version is used which depends on the version of OpenSSL the Mosquitto library
3960 =item B<CipherSuite> I<ciphersuite>
3962 A string describing the ciphers available for use. See L<ciphers(1)> and the
3963 C<openssl ciphers> utility for more information. If unset, the default ciphers
3969 =head2 Plugin C<mysql>
3971 The C<mysql plugin> requires B<mysqlclient> to be installed. It connects to
3972 one or more databases when started and keeps the connection up as long as
3973 possible. When the connection is interrupted for whatever reason it will try
3974 to re-connect. The plugin will complain loudly in case anything goes wrong.
3976 This plugin issues the MySQL C<SHOW STATUS> / C<SHOW GLOBAL STATUS> command
3977 and collects information about MySQL network traffic, executed statements,
3978 requests, the query cache and threads by evaluating the
3979 C<Bytes_{received,sent}>, C<Com_*>, C<Handler_*>, C<Qcache_*> and C<Threads_*>
3980 return values. Please refer to the B<MySQL reference manual>, I<5.1.6. Server
3981 Status Variables> for an explanation of these values.
3983 Optionally, master and slave statistics may be collected in a MySQL
3984 replication setup. In that case, information about the synchronization state
3985 of the nodes are collected by evaluating the C<Position> return value of the
3986 C<SHOW MASTER STATUS> command and the C<Seconds_Behind_Master>,
3987 C<Read_Master_Log_Pos> and C<Exec_Master_Log_Pos> return values of the
3988 C<SHOW SLAVE STATUS> command. See the B<MySQL reference manual>,
3989 I<12.5.5.21 SHOW MASTER STATUS Syntax> and
3990 I<12.5.5.31 SHOW SLAVE STATUS Syntax> for details.
4002 SSLKey "/path/to/key.pem"
4003 SSLCert "/path/to/cert.pem"
4004 SSLCA "/path/to/ca.pem"
4005 SSLCAPath "/path/to/cas/"
4006 SSLCipher "DHE-RSA-AES256-SHA"
4012 Socket "/var/run/mysql/mysqld.sock"
4014 SlaveNotifications true
4020 Socket "/var/run/mysql/mysqld.sock"
4025 A B<Database> block defines one connection to a MySQL database. It accepts a
4026 single argument which specifies the name of the database. None of the other
4027 options are required. MySQL will use default values as documented in the
4028 "mysql_real_connect()" and "mysql_ssl_set()" sections in the
4029 B<MySQL reference manual>.
4033 =item B<Alias> I<Alias>
4035 Alias to use as sender instead of hostname when reporting. This may be useful
4036 when having cryptic hostnames.
4038 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
4040 Hostname of the database server. Defaults to B<localhost>.
4042 =item B<User> I<Username>
4044 Username to use when connecting to the database. The user does not have to be
4045 granted any privileges (which is synonym to granting the C<USAGE> privilege),
4046 unless you want to collectd replication statistics (see B<MasterStats> and
4047 B<SlaveStats> below). In this case, the user needs the C<REPLICATION CLIENT>
4048 (or C<SUPER>) privileges. Else, any existing MySQL user will do.
4050 =item B<Password> I<Password>
4052 Password needed to log into the database.
4054 =item B<Database> I<Database>
4056 Select this database. Defaults to I<no database> which is a perfectly reasonable
4057 option for what this plugin does.
4059 =item B<Port> I<Port>
4061 TCP-port to connect to. The port must be specified in its numeric form, but it
4062 must be passed as a string nonetheless. For example:
4066 If B<Host> is set to B<localhost> (the default), this setting has no effect.
4067 See the documentation for the C<mysql_real_connect> function for details.
4069 =item B<Socket> I<Socket>
4071 Specifies the path to the UNIX domain socket of the MySQL server. This option
4072 only has any effect, if B<Host> is set to B<localhost> (the default).
4073 Otherwise, use the B<Port> option above. See the documentation for the
4074 C<mysql_real_connect> function for details.
4076 =item B<InnodbStats> I<true|false>
4078 If enabled, metrics about the InnoDB storage engine are collected.
4079 Disabled by default.
4081 =item B<MasterStats> I<true|false>
4083 =item B<SlaveStats> I<true|false>
4085 Enable the collection of master / slave statistics in a replication setup. In
4086 order to be able to get access to these statistics, the user needs special
4087 privileges. See the B<User> documentation above. Defaults to B<false>.
4089 =item B<SlaveNotifications> I<true|false>
4091 If enabled, the plugin sends a notification if the replication slave I/O and /
4092 or SQL threads are not running. Defaults to B<false>.
4094 =item B<WsrepStats> I<true|false>
4096 Enable the collection of wsrep plugin statistics, used in Master-Master
4097 replication setups like in MySQL Galera/Percona XtraDB Cluster.
4098 User needs only privileges to execute 'SHOW GLOBAL STATUS'
4100 =item B<ConnectTimeout> I<Seconds>
4102 Sets the connect timeout for the MySQL client.
4104 =item B<SSLKey> I<Path>
4106 If provided, the X509 key in PEM format.
4108 =item B<SSLCert> I<Path>
4110 If provided, the X509 cert in PEM format.
4112 =item B<SSLCA> I<Path>
4114 If provided, the CA file in PEM format (check OpenSSL docs).
4116 =item B<SSLCAPath> I<Path>
4118 If provided, the CA directory (check OpenSSL docs).
4120 =item B<SSLCipher> I<String>
4122 If provided, the SSL cipher to use.
4126 =head2 Plugin C<netapp>
4128 The netapp plugin can collect various performance and capacity information
4129 from a NetApp filer using the NetApp API.
4131 Please note that NetApp has a wide line of products and a lot of different
4132 software versions for each of these products. This plugin was developed for a
4133 NetApp FAS3040 running OnTap 7.2.3P8 and tested on FAS2050 7.3.1.1L1,
4134 FAS3140 7.2.5.1 and FAS3020 7.2.4P9. It I<should> work for most combinations of
4135 model and software version but it is very hard to test this.
4136 If you have used this plugin with other models and/or software version, feel
4137 free to send us a mail to tell us about the results, even if it's just a short
4140 To collect these data collectd will log in to the NetApp via HTTP(S) and HTTP
4141 basic authentication.
4143 B<Do not use a regular user for this!> Create a special collectd user with just
4144 the minimum of capabilities needed. The user only needs the "login-http-admin"
4145 capability as well as a few more depending on which data will be collected.
4146 Required capabilities are documented below.
4151 <Host "netapp1.example.com">
4175 IgnoreSelectedIO false
4177 IgnoreSelectedOps false
4178 GetLatency "volume0"
4179 IgnoreSelectedLatency false
4186 IgnoreSelectedCapacity false
4189 IgnoreSelectedSnapshot false
4217 The netapp plugin accepts the following configuration options:
4221 =item B<Host> I<Name>
4223 A host block defines one NetApp filer. It will appear in collectd with the name
4224 you specify here which does not have to be its real name nor its hostname (see
4225 the B<Address> option below).
4227 =item B<VFiler> I<Name>
4229 A B<VFiler> block may only be used inside a host block. It accepts all the
4230 same options as the B<Host> block (except for cascaded B<VFiler> blocks) and
4231 will execute all NetApp API commands in the context of the specified
4232 VFiler(R). It will appear in collectd with the name you specify here which
4233 does not have to be its real name. The VFiler name may be specified using the
4234 B<VFilerName> option. If this is not specified, it will default to the name
4237 The VFiler block inherits all connection related settings from the surrounding
4238 B<Host> block (which appear before the B<VFiler> block) but they may be
4239 overwritten inside the B<VFiler> block.
4241 This feature is useful, for example, when using a VFiler as SnapVault target
4242 (supported since OnTap 8.1). In that case, the SnapVault statistics are not
4243 available in the host filer (vfiler0) but only in the respective VFiler
4246 =item B<Protocol> B<httpd>|B<http>
4248 The protocol collectd will use to query this host.
4256 Valid options: http, https
4258 =item B<Address> I<Address>
4260 The hostname or IP address of the host.
4266 Default: The "host" block's name.
4268 =item B<Port> I<Port>
4270 The TCP port to connect to on the host.
4276 Default: 80 for protocol "http", 443 for protocol "https"
4278 =item B<User> I<User>
4280 =item B<Password> I<Password>
4282 The username and password to use to login to the NetApp.
4288 =item B<VFilerName> I<Name>
4290 The name of the VFiler in which context to execute API commands. If not
4291 specified, the name provided to the B<VFiler> block will be used instead.
4297 Default: name of the B<VFiler> block
4299 B<Note:> This option may only be used inside B<VFiler> blocks.
4301 =item B<Interval> I<Interval>
4307 The following options decide what kind of data will be collected. You can
4308 either use them as a block and fine tune various parameters inside this block,
4309 use them as a single statement to just accept all default values, or omit it to
4310 not collect any data.
4312 The following options are valid inside all blocks:
4316 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
4318 Collect the respective statistics every I<Seconds> seconds. Defaults to the
4319 host specific setting.
4323 =head3 The System block
4325 This will collect various performance data about the whole system.
4327 B<Note:> To get this data the collectd user needs the
4328 "api-perf-object-get-instances" capability.
4332 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
4334 Collect disk statistics every I<Seconds> seconds.
4336 =item B<GetCPULoad> B<true>|B<false>
4338 If you set this option to true the current CPU usage will be read. This will be
4339 the average usage between all CPUs in your NetApp without any information about
4342 B<Note:> These are the same values that the NetApp CLI command "sysstat"
4343 returns in the "CPU" field.
4351 Result: Two value lists of type "cpu", and type instances "idle" and "system".
4353 =item B<GetInterfaces> B<true>|B<false>
4355 If you set this option to true the current traffic of the network interfaces
4356 will be read. This will be the total traffic over all interfaces of your NetApp
4357 without any information about individual interfaces.
4359 B<Note:> This is the same values that the NetApp CLI command "sysstat" returns
4360 in the "Net kB/s" field.
4370 Result: One value list of type "if_octects".
4372 =item B<GetDiskIO> B<true>|B<false>
4374 If you set this option to true the current IO throughput will be read. This
4375 will be the total IO of your NetApp without any information about individual
4376 disks, volumes or aggregates.
4378 B<Note:> This is the same values that the NetApp CLI command "sysstat" returns
4379 in the "DiskE<nbsp>kB/s" field.
4387 Result: One value list of type "disk_octets".
4389 =item B<GetDiskOps> B<true>|B<false>
4391 If you set this option to true the current number of HTTP, NFS, CIFS, FCP,
4392 iSCSI, etc. operations will be read. This will be the total number of
4393 operations on your NetApp without any information about individual volumes or
4396 B<Note:> These are the same values that the NetApp CLI command "sysstat"
4397 returns in the "NFS", "CIFS", "HTTP", "FCP" and "iSCSI" fields.
4405 Result: A variable number of value lists of type "disk_ops_complex". Each type
4406 of operation will result in one value list with the name of the operation as
4411 =head3 The WAFL block
4413 This will collect various performance data about the WAFL file system. At the
4414 moment this just means cache performance.
4416 B<Note:> To get this data the collectd user needs the
4417 "api-perf-object-get-instances" capability.
4419 B<Note:> The interface to get these values is classified as "Diagnostics" by
4420 NetApp. This means that it is not guaranteed to be stable even between minor
4425 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
4427 Collect disk statistics every I<Seconds> seconds.
4429 =item B<GetNameCache> B<true>|B<false>
4437 Result: One value list of type "cache_ratio" and type instance
4440 =item B<GetDirCache> B<true>|B<false>
4448 Result: One value list of type "cache_ratio" and type instance "find_dir_hit".
4450 =item B<GetInodeCache> B<true>|B<false>
4458 Result: One value list of type "cache_ratio" and type instance
4461 =item B<GetBufferCache> B<true>|B<false>
4463 B<Note:> This is the same value that the NetApp CLI command "sysstat" returns
4464 in the "Cache hit" field.
4472 Result: One value list of type "cache_ratio" and type instance "buf_hash_hit".
4476 =head3 The Disks block
4478 This will collect performance data about the individual disks in the NetApp.
4480 B<Note:> To get this data the collectd user needs the
4481 "api-perf-object-get-instances" capability.
4485 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
4487 Collect disk statistics every I<Seconds> seconds.
4489 =item B<GetBusy> B<true>|B<false>
4491 If you set this option to true the busy time of all disks will be calculated
4492 and the value of the busiest disk in the system will be written.
4494 B<Note:> This is the same values that the NetApp CLI command "sysstat" returns
4495 in the "Disk util" field. Probably.
4503 Result: One value list of type "percent" and type instance "disk_busy".
4507 =head3 The VolumePerf block
4509 This will collect various performance data about the individual volumes.
4511 You can select which data to collect about which volume using the following
4512 options. They follow the standard ignorelist semantic.
4514 B<Note:> To get this data the collectd user needs the
4515 I<api-perf-object-get-instances> capability.
4519 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
4521 Collect volume performance data every I<Seconds> seconds.
4523 =item B<GetIO> I<Volume>
4525 =item B<GetOps> I<Volume>
4527 =item B<GetLatency> I<Volume>
4529 Select the given volume for IO, operations or latency statistics collection.
4530 The argument is the name of the volume without the C</vol/> prefix.
4532 Since the standard ignorelist functionality is used here, you can use a string
4533 starting and ending with a slash to specify regular expression matching: To
4534 match the volumes "vol0", "vol2" and "vol7", you can use this regular
4537 GetIO "/^vol[027]$/"
4539 If no regular expression is specified, an exact match is required. Both,
4540 regular and exact matching are case sensitive.
4542 If no volume was specified at all for either of the three options, that data
4543 will be collected for all available volumes.
4545 =item B<IgnoreSelectedIO> B<true>|B<false>
4547 =item B<IgnoreSelectedOps> B<true>|B<false>
4549 =item B<IgnoreSelectedLatency> B<true>|B<false>
4551 When set to B<true>, the volumes selected for IO, operations or latency
4552 statistics collection will be ignored and the data will be collected for all
4555 When set to B<false>, data will only be collected for the specified volumes and
4556 all other volumes will be ignored.
4558 If no volumes have been specified with the above B<Get*> options, all volumes
4559 will be collected regardless of the B<IgnoreSelected*> option.
4561 Defaults to B<false>
4565 =head3 The VolumeUsage block
4567 This will collect capacity data about the individual volumes.
4569 B<Note:> To get this data the collectd user needs the I<api-volume-list-info>
4574 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
4576 Collect volume usage statistics every I<Seconds> seconds.
4578 =item B<GetCapacity> I<VolumeName>
4580 The current capacity of the volume will be collected. This will result in two
4581 to four value lists, depending on the configuration of the volume. All data
4582 sources are of type "df_complex" with the name of the volume as
4585 There will be type_instances "used" and "free" for the number of used and
4586 available bytes on the volume. If the volume has some space reserved for
4587 snapshots, a type_instance "snap_reserved" will be available. If the volume
4588 has SIS enabled, a type_instance "sis_saved" will be available. This is the
4589 number of bytes saved by the SIS feature.
4591 B<Note:> The current NetApp API has a bug that results in this value being
4592 reported as a 32E<nbsp>bit number. This plugin tries to guess the correct
4593 number which works most of the time. If you see strange values here, bug
4594 NetApp support to fix this.
4596 Repeat this option to specify multiple volumes.
4598 =item B<IgnoreSelectedCapacity> B<true>|B<false>
4600 Specify whether to collect only the volumes selected by the B<GetCapacity>
4601 option or to ignore those volumes. B<IgnoreSelectedCapacity> defaults to
4602 B<false>. However, if no B<GetCapacity> option is specified at all, all
4603 capacities will be selected anyway.
4605 =item B<GetSnapshot> I<VolumeName>
4607 Select volumes from which to collect snapshot information.
4609 Usually, the space used for snapshots is included in the space reported as
4610 "used". If snapshot information is collected as well, the space used for
4611 snapshots is subtracted from the used space.
4613 To make things even more interesting, it is possible to reserve space to be
4614 used for snapshots. If the space required for snapshots is less than that
4615 reserved space, there is "reserved free" and "reserved used" space in addition
4616 to "free" and "used". If the space required for snapshots exceeds the reserved
4617 space, that part allocated in the normal space is subtracted from the "used"
4620 Repeat this option to specify multiple volumes.
4622 =item B<IgnoreSelectedSnapshot>
4624 Specify whether to collect only the volumes selected by the B<GetSnapshot>
4625 option or to ignore those volumes. B<IgnoreSelectedSnapshot> defaults to
4626 B<false>. However, if no B<GetSnapshot> option is specified at all, all
4627 capacities will be selected anyway.
4631 =head3 The Quota block
4633 This will collect (tree) quota statistics (used disk space and number of used
4634 files). This mechanism is useful to get usage information for single qtrees.
4635 In case the quotas are not used for any other purpose, an entry similar to the
4636 following in C</etc/quotas> would be sufficient:
4638 /vol/volA/some_qtree tree - - - - -
4640 After adding the entry, issue C<quota on -w volA> on the NetApp filer.
4644 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
4646 Collect SnapVault(R) statistics every I<Seconds> seconds.
4650 =head3 The SnapVault block
4652 This will collect statistics about the time and traffic of SnapVault(R)
4657 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
4659 Collect SnapVault(R) statistics every I<Seconds> seconds.
4663 =head2 Plugin C<netlink>
4665 The C<netlink> plugin uses a netlink socket to query the Linux kernel about
4666 statistics of various interface and routing aspects.
4670 =item B<Interface> I<Interface>
4672 =item B<VerboseInterface> I<Interface>
4674 Instruct the plugin to collect interface statistics. This is basically the same
4675 as the statistics provided by the C<interface> plugin (see above) but
4676 potentially much more detailed.
4678 When configuring with B<Interface> only the basic statistics will be collected,
4679 namely octets, packets, and errors. These statistics are collected by
4680 the C<interface> plugin, too, so using both at the same time is no benefit.
4682 When configured with B<VerboseInterface> all counters B<except> the basic ones,
4683 so that no data needs to be collected twice if you use the C<interface> plugin.
4684 This includes dropped packets, received multicast packets, collisions and a
4685 whole zoo of differentiated RX and TX errors. You can try the following command
4686 to get an idea of what awaits you:
4690 If I<Interface> is B<All>, all interfaces will be selected.
4692 =item B<QDisc> I<Interface> [I<QDisc>]
4694 =item B<Class> I<Interface> [I<Class>]
4696 =item B<Filter> I<Interface> [I<Filter>]
4698 Collect the octets and packets that pass a certain qdisc, class or filter.
4700 QDiscs and classes are identified by their type and handle (or classid).
4701 Filters don't necessarily have a handle, therefore the parent's handle is used.
4702 The notation used in collectd differs from that used in tc(1) in that it
4703 doesn't skip the major or minor number if it's zero and doesn't print special
4704 ids by their name. So, for example, a qdisc may be identified by
4705 C<pfifo_fast-1:0> even though the minor number of B<all> qdiscs is zero and
4706 thus not displayed by tc(1).
4708 If B<QDisc>, B<Class>, or B<Filter> is given without the second argument,
4709 i.E<nbsp>.e. without an identifier, all qdiscs, classes, or filters that are
4710 associated with that interface will be collected.
4712 Since a filter itself doesn't necessarily have a handle, the parent's handle is
4713 used. This may lead to problems when more than one filter is attached to a
4714 qdisc or class. This isn't nice, but we don't know how this could be done any
4715 better. If you have a idea, please don't hesitate to tell us.
4717 As with the B<Interface> option you can specify B<All> as the interface,
4718 meaning all interfaces.
4720 Here are some examples to help you understand the above text more easily:
4723 VerboseInterface "All"
4724 QDisc "eth0" "pfifo_fast-1:0"
4726 Class "ppp0" "htb-1:10"
4727 Filter "ppp0" "u32-1:0"
4730 =item B<IgnoreSelected>
4732 The behavior is the same as with all other similar plugins: If nothing is
4733 selected at all, everything is collected. If some things are selected using the
4734 options described above, only these statistics are collected. If you set
4735 B<IgnoreSelected> to B<true>, this behavior is inverted, i.E<nbsp>e. the
4736 specified statistics will not be collected.
4740 =head2 Plugin C<network>
4742 The Network plugin sends data to a remote instance of collectd, receives data
4743 from a remote instance, or both at the same time. Data which has been received
4744 from the network is usually not transmitted again, but this can be activated, see
4745 the B<Forward> option below.
4747 The default IPv6 multicast group is C<ff18::efc0:4a42>. The default IPv4
4748 multicast group is C<239.192.74.66>. The default I<UDP> port is B<25826>.
4750 Both, B<Server> and B<Listen> can be used as single option or as block. When
4751 used as block, given options are valid for this socket only. The following
4752 example will export the metrics twice: Once to an "internal" server (without
4753 encryption and signing) and one to an external server (with cryptographic
4757 # Export to an internal server
4758 # (demonstrates usage without additional options)
4759 Server "collectd.internal.tld"
4761 # Export to an external server
4762 # (demonstrates usage with signature options)
4763 <Server "collectd.external.tld">
4764 SecurityLevel "sign"
4765 Username "myhostname"
4772 =item B<E<lt>Server> I<Host> [I<Port>]B<E<gt>>
4774 The B<Server> statement/block sets the server to send datagrams to. The
4775 statement may occur multiple times to send each datagram to multiple
4778 The argument I<Host> may be a hostname, an IPv4 address or an IPv6 address. The
4779 optional second argument specifies a port number or a service name. If not
4780 given, the default, B<25826>, is used.
4782 The following options are recognized within B<Server> blocks:
4786 =item B<SecurityLevel> B<Encrypt>|B<Sign>|B<None>
4788 Set the security you require for network communication. When the security level
4789 has been set to B<Encrypt>, data sent over the network will be encrypted using
4790 I<AES-256>. The integrity of encrypted packets is ensured using I<SHA-1>. When
4791 set to B<Sign>, transmitted data is signed using the I<HMAC-SHA-256> message
4792 authentication code. When set to B<None>, data is sent without any security.
4794 This feature is only available if the I<network> plugin was linked with
4797 =item B<Username> I<Username>
4799 Sets the username to transmit. This is used by the server to lookup the
4800 password. See B<AuthFile> below. All security levels except B<None> require
4803 This feature is only available if the I<network> plugin was linked with
4806 =item B<Password> I<Password>
4808 Sets a password (shared secret) for this socket. All security levels except
4809 B<None> require this setting.
4811 This feature is only available if the I<network> plugin was linked with
4814 =item B<Interface> I<Interface name>
4816 Set the outgoing interface for IP packets. This applies at least
4817 to IPv6 packets and if possible to IPv4. If this option is not applicable,
4818 undefined or a non-existent interface name is specified, the default
4819 behavior is to let the kernel choose the appropriate interface. Be warned
4820 that the manual selection of an interface for unicast traffic is only
4821 necessary in rare cases.
4823 =item B<ResolveInterval> I<Seconds>
4825 Sets the interval at which to re-resolve the DNS for the I<Host>. This is
4826 useful to force a regular DNS lookup to support a high availability setup. If
4827 not specified, re-resolves are never attempted.
4831 =item B<E<lt>Listen> I<Host> [I<Port>]B<E<gt>>
4833 The B<Listen> statement sets the interfaces to bind to. When multiple
4834 statements are found the daemon will bind to multiple interfaces.
4836 The argument I<Host> may be a hostname, an IPv4 address or an IPv6 address. If
4837 the argument is a multicast address the daemon will join that multicast group.
4838 The optional second argument specifies a port number or a service name. If not
4839 given, the default, B<25826>, is used.
4841 The following options are recognized within C<E<lt>ListenE<gt>> blocks:
4845 =item B<SecurityLevel> B<Encrypt>|B<Sign>|B<None>
4847 Set the security you require for network communication. When the security level
4848 has been set to B<Encrypt>, only encrypted data will be accepted. The integrity
4849 of encrypted packets is ensured using I<SHA-1>. When set to B<Sign>, only
4850 signed and encrypted data is accepted. When set to B<None>, all data will be
4851 accepted. If an B<AuthFile> option was given (see below), encrypted data is
4852 decrypted if possible.
4854 This feature is only available if the I<network> plugin was linked with
4857 =item B<AuthFile> I<Filename>
4859 Sets a file in which usernames are mapped to passwords. These passwords are
4860 used to verify signatures and to decrypt encrypted network packets. If
4861 B<SecurityLevel> is set to B<None>, this is optional. If given, signed data is
4862 verified and encrypted packets are decrypted. Otherwise, signed data is
4863 accepted without checking the signature and encrypted data cannot be decrypted.
4864 For the other security levels this option is mandatory.
4866 The file format is very simple: Each line consists of a username followed by a
4867 colon and any number of spaces followed by the password. To demonstrate, an
4868 example file could look like this:
4873 Each time a packet is received, the modification time of the file is checked
4874 using L<stat(2)>. If the file has been changed, the contents is re-read. While
4875 the file is being read, it is locked using L<fcntl(2)>.
4877 =item B<Interface> I<Interface name>
4879 Set the incoming interface for IP packets explicitly. This applies at least
4880 to IPv6 packets and if possible to IPv4. If this option is not applicable,
4881 undefined or a non-existent interface name is specified, the default
4882 behavior is, to let the kernel choose the appropriate interface. Thus incoming
4883 traffic gets only accepted, if it arrives on the given interface.
4887 =item B<TimeToLive> I<1-255>
4889 Set the time-to-live of sent packets. This applies to all, unicast and
4890 multicast, and IPv4 and IPv6 packets. The default is to not change this value.
4891 That means that multicast packets will be sent with a TTL of C<1> (one) on most
4894 =item B<MaxPacketSize> I<1024-65535>
4896 Set the maximum size for datagrams received over the network. Packets larger
4897 than this will be truncated. Defaults to 1452E<nbsp>bytes, which is the maximum
4898 payload size that can be transmitted in one Ethernet frame using IPv6E<nbsp>/
4901 On the server side, this limit should be set to the largest value used on
4902 I<any> client. Likewise, the value on the client must not be larger than the
4903 value on the server, or data will be lost.
4905 B<Compatibility:> Versions prior to I<versionE<nbsp>4.8> used a fixed sized
4906 buffer of 1024E<nbsp>bytes. Versions I<4.8>, I<4.9> and I<4.10> used a default
4907 value of 1024E<nbsp>bytes to avoid problems when sending data to an older
4910 =item B<Forward> I<true|false>
4912 If set to I<true>, write packets that were received via the network plugin to
4913 the sending sockets. This should only be activated when the B<Listen>- and
4914 B<Server>-statements differ. Otherwise packets may be send multiple times to
4915 the same multicast group. While this results in more network traffic than
4916 necessary it's not a huge problem since the plugin has a duplicate detection,
4917 so the values will not loop.
4919 =item B<ReportStats> B<true>|B<false>
4921 The network plugin cannot only receive and send statistics, it can also create
4922 statistics about itself. Collectd data included the number of received and
4923 sent octets and packets, the length of the receive queue and the number of
4924 values handled. When set to B<true>, the I<Network plugin> will make these
4925 statistics available. Defaults to B<false>.
4929 =head2 Plugin C<nginx>
4931 This plugin collects the number of connections and requests handled by the
4932 C<nginx daemon> (speak: engineE<nbsp>X), a HTTP and mail server/proxy. It
4933 queries the page provided by the C<ngx_http_stub_status_module> module, which
4934 isn't compiled by default. Please refer to
4935 L<http://wiki.codemongers.com/NginxStubStatusModule> for more information on
4936 how to compile and configure nginx and this module.
4938 The following options are accepted by the C<nginx plugin>:
4942 =item B<URL> I<http://host/nginx_status>
4944 Sets the URL of the C<ngx_http_stub_status_module> output.
4946 =item B<User> I<Username>
4948 Optional user name needed for authentication.
4950 =item B<Password> I<Password>
4952 Optional password needed for authentication.
4954 =item B<VerifyPeer> B<true|false>
4956 Enable or disable peer SSL certificate verification. See
4957 L<http://curl.haxx.se/docs/sslcerts.html> for details. Enabled by default.
4959 =item B<VerifyHost> B<true|false>
4961 Enable or disable peer host name verification. If enabled, the plugin checks
4962 if the C<Common Name> or a C<Subject Alternate Name> field of the SSL
4963 certificate matches the host name provided by the B<URL> option. If this
4964 identity check fails, the connection is aborted. Obviously, only works when
4965 connecting to a SSL enabled server. Enabled by default.
4967 =item B<CACert> I<File>
4969 File that holds one or more SSL certificates. If you want to use HTTPS you will
4970 possibly need this option. What CA certificates come bundled with C<libcurl>
4971 and are checked by default depends on the distribution you use.
4973 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
4975 The B<Timeout> option sets the overall timeout for HTTP requests to B<URL>, in
4976 milliseconds. By default, the configured B<Interval> is used to set the
4981 =head2 Plugin C<notify_desktop>
4983 This plugin sends a desktop notification to a notification daemon, as defined
4984 in the Desktop Notification Specification. To actually display the
4985 notifications, B<notification-daemon> is required and B<collectd> has to be
4986 able to access the X server (i.E<nbsp>e., the C<DISPLAY> and C<XAUTHORITY>
4987 environment variables have to be set correctly) and the D-Bus message bus.
4989 The Desktop Notification Specification can be found at
4990 L<http://www.galago-project.org/specs/notification/>.
4994 =item B<OkayTimeout> I<timeout>
4996 =item B<WarningTimeout> I<timeout>
4998 =item B<FailureTimeout> I<timeout>
5000 Set the I<timeout>, in milliseconds, after which to expire the notification
5001 for C<OKAY>, C<WARNING> and C<FAILURE> severities respectively. If zero has
5002 been specified, the displayed notification will not be closed at all - the
5003 user has to do so herself. These options default to 5000. If a negative number
5004 has been specified, the default is used as well.
5008 =head2 Plugin C<notify_email>
5010 The I<notify_email> plugin uses the I<ESMTP> library to send notifications to a
5011 configured email address.
5013 I<libESMTP> is available from L<http://www.stafford.uklinux.net/libesmtp/>.
5015 Available configuration options:
5019 =item B<From> I<Address>
5021 Email address from which the emails should appear to come from.
5023 Default: C<root@localhost>
5025 =item B<Recipient> I<Address>
5027 Configures the email address(es) to which the notifications should be mailed.
5028 May be repeated to send notifications to multiple addresses.
5030 At least one B<Recipient> must be present for the plugin to work correctly.
5032 =item B<SMTPServer> I<Hostname>
5034 Hostname of the SMTP server to connect to.
5036 Default: C<localhost>
5038 =item B<SMTPPort> I<Port>
5040 TCP port to connect to.
5044 =item B<SMTPUser> I<Username>
5046 Username for ASMTP authentication. Optional.
5048 =item B<SMTPPassword> I<Password>
5050 Password for ASMTP authentication. Optional.
5052 =item B<Subject> I<Subject>
5054 Subject-template to use when sending emails. There must be exactly two
5055 string-placeholders in the subject, given in the standard I<printf(3)> syntax,
5056 i.E<nbsp>e. C<%s>. The first will be replaced with the severity, the second
5059 Default: C<Collectd notify: %s@%s>
5063 =head2 Plugin C<notify_nagios>
5065 The I<notify_nagios> plugin writes notifications to Nagios' I<command file> as
5066 a I<passive service check result>.
5068 Available configuration options:
5072 =item B<CommandFile> I<Path>
5074 Sets the I<command file> to write to. Defaults to F</usr/local/nagios/var/rw/nagios.cmd>.
5078 =head2 Plugin C<ntpd>
5080 The C<ntpd> plugin collects per-peer ntp data such as time offset and time
5083 For talking to B<ntpd>, it mimics what the B<ntpdc> control program does on
5084 the wire - using B<mode 7> specific requests. This mode is deprecated with
5085 newer B<ntpd> releases (4.2.7p230 and later). For the C<ntpd> plugin to work
5086 correctly with them, the ntp daemon must be explicitly configured to
5087 enable B<mode 7> (which is disabled by default). Refer to the I<ntp.conf(5)>
5088 manual page for details.
5090 Available configuration options for the C<ntpd> plugin:
5094 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
5096 Hostname of the host running B<ntpd>. Defaults to B<localhost>.
5098 =item B<Port> I<Port>
5100 UDP-Port to connect to. Defaults to B<123>.
5102 =item B<ReverseLookups> B<true>|B<false>
5104 Sets whether or not to perform reverse lookups on peers. Since the name or
5105 IP-address may be used in a filename it is recommended to disable reverse
5106 lookups. The default is to do reverse lookups to preserve backwards
5107 compatibility, though.
5109 =item B<IncludeUnitID> B<true>|B<false>
5111 When a peer is a refclock, include the unit ID in the I<type instance>.
5112 Defaults to B<false> for backward compatibility.
5114 If two refclock peers use the same driver and this is B<false>, the plugin will
5115 try to write simultaneous measurements from both to the same type instance.
5116 This will result in error messages in the log and only one set of measurements
5121 =head2 Plugin C<nut>
5125 =item B<UPS> I<upsname>B<@>I<hostname>[B<:>I<port>]
5127 Add a UPS to collect data from. The format is identical to the one accepted by
5130 =item B<ForceSSL> B<true>|B<false>
5132 Stops connections from falling back to unsecured if an SSL connection
5133 cannot be established. Defaults to false if undeclared.
5135 =item B<VerifyPeer> I<true>|I<false>
5137 If set to true, requires a CAPath be provided. Will use the CAPath to find
5138 certificates to use as Trusted Certificates to validate a upsd server certificate.
5139 If validation of the upsd server certificate fails, the connection will not be
5140 established. If ForceSSL is undeclared or set to false, setting VerifyPeer to true
5141 will override and set ForceSSL to true.
5143 =item B<CAPath> I/path/to/certs/folder
5145 If VerifyPeer is set to true, this is required. Otherwise this is ignored.
5146 The folder pointed at must contain certificate(s) named according to their hash.
5147 Ex: XXXXXXXX.Y where X is the hash value of a cert and Y is 0. If name collisions
5148 occur because two different certs have the same hash value, Y can be incremented
5149 in order to avoid conflict. To create a symbolic link to a certificate the following
5150 command can be used from within the directory where the cert resides:
5152 C<ln -s some.crt ./$(openssl x509 -hash -noout -in some.crt).0>
5154 Alternatively, the package openssl-perl provides a command C<c_rehash> that will
5155 generate links like the one described above for ALL certs in a given folder.
5157 C<c_rehash /path/to/certs/folder>
5161 =head2 Plugin C<olsrd>
5163 The I<olsrd> plugin connects to the TCP port opened by the I<txtinfo> plugin of
5164 the Optimized Link State Routing daemon and reads information about the current
5165 state of the meshed network.
5167 The following configuration options are understood:
5171 =item B<Host> I<Host>
5173 Connect to I<Host>. Defaults to B<"localhost">.
5175 =item B<Port> I<Port>
5177 Specifies the port to connect to. This must be a string, even if you give the
5178 port as a number rather than a service name. Defaults to B<"2006">.
5180 =item B<CollectLinks> B<No>|B<Summary>|B<Detail>
5182 Specifies what information to collect about links, i.E<nbsp>e. direct
5183 connections of the daemon queried. If set to B<No>, no information is
5184 collected. If set to B<Summary>, the number of links and the average of all
5185 I<link quality> (LQ) and I<neighbor link quality> (NLQ) values is calculated.
5186 If set to B<Detail> LQ and NLQ are collected per link.
5188 Defaults to B<Detail>.
5190 =item B<CollectRoutes> B<No>|B<Summary>|B<Detail>
5192 Specifies what information to collect about routes of the daemon queried. If
5193 set to B<No>, no information is collected. If set to B<Summary>, the number of
5194 routes and the average I<metric> and I<ETX> is calculated. If set to B<Detail>
5195 metric and ETX are collected per route.
5197 Defaults to B<Summary>.
5199 =item B<CollectTopology> B<No>|B<Summary>|B<Detail>
5201 Specifies what information to collect about the global topology. If set to
5202 B<No>, no information is collected. If set to B<Summary>, the number of links
5203 in the entire topology and the average I<link quality> (LQ) is calculated.
5204 If set to B<Detail> LQ and NLQ are collected for each link in the entire topology.
5206 Defaults to B<Summary>.
5210 =head2 Plugin C<onewire>
5212 B<EXPERIMENTAL!> See notes below.
5214 The C<onewire> plugin uses the B<owcapi> library from the B<owfs> project
5215 L<http://owfs.org/> to read sensors connected via the onewire bus.
5217 It can be used in two possible modes - standard or advanced.
5219 In the standard mode only temperature sensors (sensors with the family code
5220 C<10>, C<22> and C<28> - e.g. DS1820, DS18S20, DS1920) can be read. If you have
5221 other sensors you would like to have included, please send a sort request to
5222 the mailing list. You can select sensors to be read or to be ignored depending
5223 on the option B<IgnoreSelected>). When no list is provided the whole bus is
5224 walked and all sensors are read.
5226 Hubs (the DS2409 chips) are working, but read the note, why this plugin is
5227 experimental, below.
5229 In the advanced mode you can configure any sensor to be read (only numerical
5230 value) using full OWFS path (e.g. "/uncached/10.F10FCA000800/temperature").
5231 In this mode you have to list all the sensors. Neither default bus walk nor
5232 B<IgnoreSelected> are used here. Address and type (file) is extracted from
5233 the path automatically and should produce compatible structure with the "standard"
5234 mode (basically the path is expected as for example
5235 "/uncached/10.F10FCA000800/temperature" where it would extract address part
5236 "F10FCA000800" and the rest after the slash is considered the type - here
5238 There are two advantages to this mode - you can access virtually any sensor
5239 (not just temperature), select whether to use cached or directly read values
5240 and it is slighlty faster. The downside is more complex configuration.
5242 The two modes are distinguished automatically by the format of the address.
5243 It is not possible to mix the two modes. Once a full path is detected in any
5244 B<Sensor> then the whole addressing (all sensors) is considered to be this way
5245 (and as standard addresses will fail parsing they will be ignored).
5249 =item B<Device> I<Device>
5251 Sets the device to read the values from. This can either be a "real" hardware
5252 device, such as a serial port or an USB port, or the address of the
5253 L<owserver(1)> socket, usually B<localhost:4304>.
5255 Though the documentation claims to automatically recognize the given address
5256 format, with versionE<nbsp>2.7p4 we had to specify the type explicitly. So
5257 with that version, the following configuration worked for us:
5260 Device "-s localhost:4304"
5263 This directive is B<required> and does not have a default value.
5265 =item B<Sensor> I<Sensor>
5267 In the standard mode selects sensors to collect or to ignore
5268 (depending on B<IgnoreSelected>, see below). Sensors are specified without
5269 the family byte at the beginning, so you have to use for example C<F10FCA000800>,
5270 and B<not> include the leading C<10.> family byte and point.
5271 When no B<Sensor> is configured the whole Onewire bus is walked and all supported
5272 sensors (see above) are read.
5274 In the advanced mode the B<Sensor> specifies full OWFS path - e.g.
5275 C</uncached/10.F10FCA000800/temperature> (or when cached values are OK
5276 C</10.F10FCA000800/temperature>). B<IgnoreSelected> is not used.
5278 As there can be multiple devices on the bus you can list multiple sensor (use
5279 multiple B<Sensor> elements).
5281 =item B<IgnoreSelected> I<true>|I<false>
5283 If no configuration is given, the B<onewire> plugin will collect data from all
5284 sensors found. This may not be practical, especially if sensors are added and
5285 removed regularly. Sometimes, however, it's easier/preferred to collect only
5286 specific sensors or all sensors I<except> a few specified ones. This option
5287 enables you to do that: By setting B<IgnoreSelected> to I<true> the effect of
5288 B<Sensor> is inverted: All selected interfaces are ignored and all other
5289 interfaces are collected.
5291 Used only in the standard mode - see above.
5293 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
5295 Sets the interval in which all sensors should be read. If not specified, the
5296 global B<Interval> setting is used.
5300 B<EXPERIMENTAL!> The C<onewire> plugin is experimental, because it doesn't yet
5301 work with big setups. It works with one sensor being attached to one
5302 controller, but as soon as you throw in a couple more senors and maybe a hub
5303 or two, reading all values will take more than ten seconds (the default
5304 interval). We will probably add some separate thread for reading the sensors
5305 and some cache or something like that, but it's not done yet. We will try to
5306 maintain backwards compatibility in the future, but we can't promise. So in
5307 short: If it works for you: Great! But keep in mind that the config I<might>
5308 change, though this is unlikely. Oh, and if you want to help improving this
5309 plugin, just send a short notice to the mailing list. ThanksE<nbsp>:)
5311 =head2 Plugin C<openldap>
5313 To use the C<openldap> plugin you first need to configure the I<OpenLDAP>
5314 server correctly. The backend database C<monitor> needs to be loaded and
5315 working. See slapd-monitor(5) for the details.
5317 The configuration of the C<openldap> plugin consists of one or more B<Instance>
5318 blocks. Each block requires one string argument as the instance name. For
5323 URL "ldap://localhost/"
5326 URL "ldaps://localhost/"
5330 The instance name will be used as the I<plugin instance>. To emulate the old
5331 (versionE<nbsp>4) behavior, you can use an empty string (""). In order for the
5332 plugin to work correctly, each instance name must be unique. This is not
5333 enforced by the plugin and it is your responsibility to ensure it is.
5335 The following options are accepted within each B<Instance> block:
5339 =item B<URL> I<ldap://host/binddn>
5341 Sets the URL to use to connect to the I<OpenLDAP> server. This option is
5344 =item B<BindDN> I<BindDN>
5346 Name in the form of an LDAP distinguished name intended to be used for
5347 authentication. Defaults to empty string to establish an anonymous authorization.
5349 =item B<Password> I<Password>
5351 Password for simple bind authentication. If this option is not set,
5352 unauthenticated bind operation is used.
5354 =item B<StartTLS> B<true|false>
5356 Defines whether TLS must be used when connecting to the I<OpenLDAP> server.
5357 Disabled by default.
5359 =item B<VerifyHost> B<true|false>
5361 Enables or disables peer host name verification. If enabled, the plugin checks
5362 if the C<Common Name> or a C<Subject Alternate Name> field of the SSL
5363 certificate matches the host name provided by the B<URL> option. If this
5364 identity check fails, the connection is aborted. Enabled by default.
5366 =item B<CACert> I<File>
5368 File that holds one or more SSL certificates. If you want to use TLS/SSL you
5369 may possibly need this option. What CA certificates are checked by default
5370 depends on the distribution you use and can be changed with the usual ldap
5371 client configuration mechanisms. See ldap.conf(5) for the details.
5373 =item B<Timeout> I<Seconds>
5375 Sets the timeout value for ldap operations, in seconds. By default, the
5376 configured B<Interval> is used to set the timeout. Use B<-1> to disable
5379 =item B<Version> I<Version>
5381 An integer which sets the LDAP protocol version number to use when connecting
5382 to the I<OpenLDAP> server. Defaults to B<3> for using I<LDAPv3>.
5386 =head2 Plugin C<openvpn>
5388 The OpenVPN plugin reads a status file maintained by OpenVPN and gathers
5389 traffic statistics about connected clients.
5391 To set up OpenVPN to write to the status file periodically, use the
5392 B<--status> option of OpenVPN. Since OpenVPN can write two different formats,
5393 you need to set the required format, too. This is done by setting
5394 B<--status-version> to B<2>.
5396 So, in a nutshell you need:
5398 openvpn $OTHER_OPTIONS \
5399 --status "/var/run/openvpn-status" 10 \
5406 =item B<StatusFile> I<File>
5408 Specifies the location of the status file.
5410 =item B<ImprovedNamingSchema> B<true>|B<false>
5412 When enabled, the filename of the status file will be used as plugin instance
5413 and the client's "common name" will be used as type instance. This is required
5414 when reading multiple status files. Enabling this option is recommended, but to
5415 maintain backwards compatibility this option is disabled by default.
5417 =item B<CollectCompression> B<true>|B<false>
5419 Sets whether or not statistics about the compression used by OpenVPN should be
5420 collected. This information is only available in I<single> mode. Enabled by
5423 =item B<CollectIndividualUsers> B<true>|B<false>
5425 Sets whether or not traffic information is collected for each connected client
5426 individually. If set to false, currently no traffic data is collected at all
5427 because aggregating this data in a save manner is tricky. Defaults to B<true>.
5429 =item B<CollectUserCount> B<true>|B<false>
5431 When enabled, the number of currently connected clients or users is collected.
5432 This is especially interesting when B<CollectIndividualUsers> is disabled, but
5433 can be configured independently from that option. Defaults to B<false>.
5437 =head2 Plugin C<oracle>
5439 The "oracle" plugin uses the Oracle® Call Interface I<(OCI)> to connect to an
5440 Oracle® Database and lets you execute SQL statements there. It is very similar
5441 to the "dbi" plugin, because it was written around the same time. See the "dbi"
5442 plugin's documentation above for details.
5445 <Query "out_of_stock">
5446 Statement "SELECT category, COUNT(*) AS value FROM products WHERE in_stock = 0 GROUP BY category"
5449 # InstancePrefix "foo"
5450 InstancesFrom "category"
5454 <Database "product_information">
5458 Query "out_of_stock"
5462 =head3 B<Query> blocks
5464 The Query blocks are handled identically to the Query blocks of the "dbi"
5465 plugin. Please see its documentation above for details on how to specify
5468 =head3 B<Database> blocks
5470 Database blocks define a connection to a database and which queries should be
5471 sent to that database. Each database needs a "name" as string argument in the
5472 starting tag of the block. This name will be used as "PluginInstance" in the
5473 values submitted to the daemon. Other than that, that name is not used.
5477 =item B<ConnectID> I<ID>
5479 Defines the "database alias" or "service name" to connect to. Usually, these
5480 names are defined in the file named C<$ORACLE_HOME/network/admin/tnsnames.ora>.
5482 =item B<Host> I<Host>
5484 Hostname to use when dispatching values for this database. Defaults to using
5485 the global hostname of the I<collectd> instance.
5487 =item B<Username> I<Username>
5489 Username used for authentication.
5491 =item B<Password> I<Password>
5493 Password used for authentication.
5495 =item B<Query> I<QueryName>
5497 Associates the query named I<QueryName> with this database connection. The
5498 query needs to be defined I<before> this statement, i.E<nbsp>e. all query
5499 blocks you want to refer to must be placed above the database block you want to
5504 =head2 Plugin C<ovs_events>
5506 The I<ovs_events> plugin monitors the link status of I<Open vSwitch> (OVS)
5507 connected interfaces, dispatches the values to collectd and sends the
5508 notification whenever the link state change occurs. This plugin uses OVS
5509 database to get a link state change notification.
5513 <Plugin "ovs_events">
5516 Socket "/var/run/openvswitch/db.sock"
5517 Interfaces "br0" "veth0"
5518 SendNotification false
5521 The plugin provides the following configuration options:
5525 =item B<Address> I<node>
5527 The address of the OVS DB server JSON-RPC interface used by the plugin. To
5528 enable the interface, OVS DB daemon should be running with C<--remote=ptcp:>
5529 option. See L<ovsdb-server(1)> for more details. The option may be either
5530 network hostname, IPv4 numbers-and-dots notation or IPv6 hexadecimal string
5531 format. Defaults to B<'localhost'>.
5533 =item B<Port> I<service>
5535 TCP-port to connect to. Either a service name or a port number may be given.
5536 Defaults to B<6640>.
5538 =item B<Socket> I<path>
5540 The UNIX domain socket path of OVS DB server JSON-RPC interface used by the
5541 plugin. To enable the interface, the OVS DB daemon should be running with
5542 C<--remote=punix:> option. See L<ovsdb-server(1)> for more details. If this
5543 option is set, B<Address> and B<Port> options are ignored.
5545 =item B<Interfaces> [I<ifname> ...]
5547 List of interface names to be monitored by this plugin. If this option is not
5548 specified or is empty then all OVS connected interfaces on all bridges are
5551 Default: empty (all interfaces on all bridges are monitored)
5553 =item B<SendNotification> I<true|false>
5555 If set to true, OVS link notifications (interface status and OVS DB connection
5556 terminate) are sent to collectd. Default value is false.
5560 B<Note:> By default, the global interval setting is used within which to
5561 retrieve the OVS link status. To configure a plugin-specific interval, please
5562 use B<Interval> option of the OVS B<LoadPlugin> block settings. For milliseconds
5563 simple divide the time by 1000 for example if the desired interval is 50ms, set
5566 =head2 Plugin C<perl>
5568 This plugin embeds a Perl-interpreter into collectd and provides an interface
5569 to collectd's plugin system. See L<collectd-perl(5)> for its documentation.
5571 =head2 Plugin C<pinba>
5573 The I<Pinba plugin> receives profiling information from I<Pinba>, an extension
5574 for the I<PHP> interpreter. At the end of executing a script, i.e. after a
5575 PHP-based webpage has been delivered, the extension will send a UDP packet
5576 containing timing information, peak memory usage and so on. The plugin will
5577 wait for such packets, parse them and account the provided information, which
5578 is then dispatched to the daemon once per interval.
5585 # Overall statistics for the website.
5587 Server "www.example.com"
5589 # Statistics for www-a only
5591 Host "www-a.example.com"
5592 Server "www.example.com"
5594 # Statistics for www-b only
5596 Host "www-b.example.com"
5597 Server "www.example.com"
5601 The plugin provides the following configuration options:
5605 =item B<Address> I<Node>
5607 Configures the address used to open a listening socket. By default, plugin will
5608 bind to the I<any> address C<::0>.
5610 =item B<Port> I<Service>
5612 Configures the port (service) to bind to. By default the default Pinba port
5613 "30002" will be used. The option accepts service names in addition to port
5614 numbers and thus requires a I<string> argument.
5616 =item E<lt>B<View> I<Name>E<gt> block
5618 The packets sent by the Pinba extension include the hostname of the server, the
5619 server name (the name of the virtual host) and the script that was executed.
5620 Using B<View> blocks it is possible to separate the data into multiple groups
5621 to get more meaningful statistics. Each packet is added to all matching groups,
5622 so that a packet may be accounted for more than once.
5626 =item B<Host> I<Host>
5628 Matches the hostname of the system the webserver / script is running on. This
5629 will contain the result of the L<gethostname(2)> system call. If not
5630 configured, all hostnames will be accepted.
5632 =item B<Server> I<Server>
5634 Matches the name of the I<virtual host>, i.e. the contents of the
5635 C<$_SERVER["SERVER_NAME"]> variable when within PHP. If not configured, all
5636 server names will be accepted.
5638 =item B<Script> I<Script>
5640 Matches the name of the I<script name>, i.e. the contents of the
5641 C<$_SERVER["SCRIPT_NAME"]> variable when within PHP. If not configured, all
5642 script names will be accepted.
5648 =head2 Plugin C<ping>
5650 The I<Ping> plugin starts a new thread which sends ICMP "ping" packets to the
5651 configured hosts periodically and measures the network latency. Whenever the
5652 C<read> function of the plugin is called, it submits the average latency, the
5653 standard deviation and the drop rate for each host.
5655 Available configuration options:
5659 =item B<Host> I<IP-address>
5661 Host to ping periodically. This option may be repeated several times to ping
5664 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
5666 Sets the interval in which to send ICMP echo packets to the configured hosts.
5667 This is B<not> the interval in which statistics are queries from the plugin but
5668 the interval in which the hosts are "pinged". Therefore, the setting here
5669 should be smaller than or equal to the global B<Interval> setting. Fractional
5670 times, such as "1.24" are allowed.
5674 =item B<Timeout> I<Seconds>
5676 Time to wait for a response from the host to which an ICMP packet had been
5677 sent. If a reply was not received after I<Seconds> seconds, the host is assumed
5678 to be down or the packet to be dropped. This setting must be smaller than the
5679 B<Interval> setting above for the plugin to work correctly. Fractional
5680 arguments are accepted.
5684 =item B<TTL> I<0-255>
5686 Sets the Time-To-Live of generated ICMP packets.
5688 =item B<Size> I<size>
5690 Sets the size of the data payload in ICMP packet to specified I<size> (it
5691 will be filled with regular ASCII pattern). If not set, default 56 byte
5692 long string is used so that the packet size of an ICMPv4 packet is exactly
5693 64 bytes, similar to the behaviour of normal ping(1) command.
5695 =item B<SourceAddress> I<host>
5697 Sets the source address to use. I<host> may either be a numerical network
5698 address or a network hostname.
5700 =item B<Device> I<name>
5702 Sets the outgoing network device to be used. I<name> has to specify an
5703 interface name (e.E<nbsp>g. C<eth0>). This might not be supported by all
5706 =item B<MaxMissed> I<Packets>
5708 Trigger a DNS resolve after the host has not replied to I<Packets> packets. This
5709 enables the use of dynamic DNS services (like dyndns.org) with the ping plugin.
5711 Default: B<-1> (disabled)
5715 =head2 Plugin C<postgresql>
5717 The C<postgresql> plugin queries statistics from PostgreSQL databases. It
5718 keeps a persistent connection to all configured databases and tries to
5719 reconnect if the connection has been interrupted. A database is configured by
5720 specifying a B<Database> block as described below. The default statistics are
5721 collected from PostgreSQL's B<statistics collector> which thus has to be
5722 enabled for this plugin to work correctly. This should usually be the case by
5723 default. See the section "The Statistics Collector" of the B<PostgreSQL
5724 Documentation> for details.
5726 By specifying custom database queries using a B<Query> block as described
5727 below, you may collect any data that is available from some PostgreSQL
5728 database. This way, you are able to access statistics of external daemons
5729 which are available in a PostgreSQL database or use future or special
5730 statistics provided by PostgreSQL without the need to upgrade your collectd
5733 Starting with version 5.2, the C<postgresql> plugin supports writing data to
5734 PostgreSQL databases as well. This has been implemented in a generic way. You
5735 need to specify an SQL statement which will then be executed by collectd in
5736 order to write the data (see below for details). The benefit of that approach
5737 is that there is no fixed database layout. Rather, the layout may be optimized
5738 for the current setup.
5740 The B<PostgreSQL Documentation> manual can be found at
5741 L<http://www.postgresql.org/docs/manuals/>.
5745 Statement "SELECT magic FROM wizard WHERE host = $1;"
5749 InstancePrefix "magic"
5754 <Query rt36_tickets>
5755 Statement "SELECT COUNT(type) AS count, type \
5757 WHEN resolved = 'epoch' THEN 'open' \
5758 ELSE 'resolved' END AS type \
5759 FROM tickets) type \
5763 InstancePrefix "rt36_tickets"
5764 InstancesFrom "type"
5770 Statement "SELECT collectd_insert($1, $2, $3, $4, $5, $6, $7, $8, $9);"
5780 KRBSrvName "kerberos_service_name"
5786 Service "service_name"
5787 Query backend # predefined
5798 The B<Query> block defines one database query which may later be used by a
5799 database definition. It accepts a single mandatory argument which specifies
5800 the name of the query. The names of all queries have to be unique (see the
5801 B<MinVersion> and B<MaxVersion> options below for an exception to this
5804 In each B<Query> block, there is one or more B<Result> blocks. Multiple
5805 B<Result> blocks may be used to extract multiple values from a single query.
5807 The following configuration options are available to define the query:
5811 =item B<Statement> I<sql query statement>
5813 Specify the I<sql query statement> which the plugin should execute. The string
5814 may contain the tokens B<$1>, B<$2>, etc. which are used to reference the
5815 first, second, etc. parameter. The value of the parameters is specified by the
5816 B<Param> configuration option - see below for details. To include a literal
5817 B<$> character followed by a number, surround it with single quotes (B<'>).
5819 Any SQL command which may return data (such as C<SELECT> or C<SHOW>) is
5820 allowed. Note, however, that only a single command may be used. Semicolons are
5821 allowed as long as a single non-empty command has been specified only.
5823 The returned lines will be handled separately one after another.
5825 =item B<Param> I<hostname>|I<database>|I<instance>|I<username>|I<interval>
5827 Specify the parameters which should be passed to the SQL query. The parameters
5828 are referred to in the SQL query as B<$1>, B<$2>, etc. in the same order as
5829 they appear in the configuration file. The value of the parameter is
5830 determined depending on the value of the B<Param> option as follows:
5836 The configured hostname of the database connection. If a UNIX domain socket is
5837 used, the parameter expands to "localhost".
5841 The name of the database of the current connection.
5845 The name of the database plugin instance. See the B<Instance> option of the
5846 database specification below for details.
5850 The username used to connect to the database.
5854 The interval with which this database is queried (as specified by the database
5855 specific or global B<Interval> options).
5859 Please note that parameters are only supported by PostgreSQL's protocol
5860 version 3 and above which was introduced in version 7.4 of PostgreSQL.
5862 =item B<PluginInstanceFrom> I<column>
5864 Specify how to create the "PluginInstance" for reporting this query results.
5865 Only one column is supported. You may concatenate fields and string values in
5866 the query statement to get the required results.
5868 =item B<MinVersion> I<version>
5870 =item B<MaxVersion> I<version>
5872 Specify the minimum or maximum version of PostgreSQL that this query should be
5873 used with. Some statistics might only be available with certain versions of
5874 PostgreSQL. This allows you to specify multiple queries with the same name but
5875 which apply to different versions, thus allowing you to use the same
5876 configuration in a heterogeneous environment.
5878 The I<version> has to be specified as the concatenation of the major, minor
5879 and patch-level versions, each represented as two-decimal-digit numbers. For
5880 example, version 8.2.3 will become 80203.
5884 The B<Result> block defines how to handle the values returned from the query.
5885 It defines which column holds which value and how to dispatch that value to
5890 =item B<Type> I<type>
5892 The I<type> name to be used when dispatching the values. The type describes
5893 how to handle the data and where to store it. See L<types.db(5)> for more
5894 details on types and their configuration. The number and type of values (as
5895 selected by the B<ValuesFrom> option) has to match the type of the given name.
5897 This option is mandatory.
5899 =item B<InstancePrefix> I<prefix>
5901 =item B<InstancesFrom> I<column0> [I<column1> ...]
5903 Specify how to create the "TypeInstance" for each data set (i.E<nbsp>e. line).
5904 B<InstancePrefix> defines a static prefix that will be prepended to all type
5905 instances. B<InstancesFrom> defines the column names whose values will be used
5906 to create the type instance. Multiple values will be joined together using the
5907 hyphen (C<->) as separation character.
5909 The plugin itself does not check whether or not all built instances are
5910 different. It is your responsibility to assure that each is unique.
5912 Both options are optional. If none is specified, the type instance will be
5915 =item B<ValuesFrom> I<column0> [I<column1> ...]
5917 Names the columns whose content is used as the actual data for the data sets
5918 that are dispatched to the daemon. How many such columns you need is
5919 determined by the B<Type> setting as explained above. If you specify too many
5920 or not enough columns, the plugin will complain about that and no data will be
5921 submitted to the daemon.
5923 The actual data type, as seen by PostgreSQL, is not that important as long as
5924 it represents numbers. The plugin will automatically cast the values to the
5925 right type if it know how to do that. For that, it uses the L<strtoll(3)> and
5926 L<strtod(3)> functions, so anything supported by those functions is supported
5927 by the plugin as well.
5929 This option is required inside a B<Result> block and may be specified multiple
5930 times. If multiple B<ValuesFrom> options are specified, the columns are read
5935 The following predefined queries are available (the definitions can be found
5936 in the F<postgresql_default.conf> file which, by default, is available at
5937 C<I<prefix>/share/collectd/>):
5943 This query collects the number of backends, i.E<nbsp>e. the number of
5946 =item B<transactions>
5948 This query collects the numbers of committed and rolled-back transactions of
5953 This query collects the numbers of various table modifications (i.E<nbsp>e.
5954 insertions, updates, deletions) of the user tables.
5956 =item B<query_plans>
5958 This query collects the numbers of various table scans and returned tuples of
5961 =item B<table_states>
5963 This query collects the numbers of live and dead rows in the user tables.
5967 This query collects disk block access counts for user tables.
5971 This query collects the on-disk size of the database in bytes.
5975 In addition, the following detailed queries are available by default. Please
5976 note that each of those queries collects information B<by table>, thus,
5977 potentially producing B<a lot> of data. For details see the description of the
5978 non-by_table queries above.
5982 =item B<queries_by_table>
5984 =item B<query_plans_by_table>
5986 =item B<table_states_by_table>
5988 =item B<disk_io_by_table>
5992 The B<Writer> block defines a PostgreSQL writer backend. It accepts a single
5993 mandatory argument specifying the name of the writer. This will then be used
5994 in the B<Database> specification in order to activate the writer instance. The
5995 names of all writers have to be unique. The following options may be
6000 =item B<Statement> I<sql statement>
6002 This mandatory option specifies the SQL statement that will be executed for
6003 each submitted value. A single SQL statement is allowed only. Anything after
6004 the first semicolon will be ignored.
6006 Nine parameters will be passed to the statement and should be specified as
6007 tokens B<$1>, B<$2>, through B<$9> in the statement string. The following
6008 values are made available through those parameters:
6014 The timestamp of the queried value as an RFC 3339-formatted local time.
6018 The hostname of the queried value.
6022 The plugin name of the queried value.
6026 The plugin instance of the queried value. This value may be B<NULL> if there
6027 is no plugin instance.
6031 The type of the queried value (cf. L<types.db(5)>).
6035 The type instance of the queried value. This value may be B<NULL> if there is
6040 An array of names for the submitted values (i.E<nbsp>e., the name of the data
6041 sources of the submitted value-list).
6045 An array of types for the submitted values (i.E<nbsp>e., the type of the data
6046 sources of the submitted value-list; C<counter>, C<gauge>, ...). Note, that if
6047 B<StoreRates> is enabled (which is the default, see below), all types will be
6052 An array of the submitted values. The dimensions of the value name and value
6057 In general, it is advisable to create and call a custom function in the
6058 PostgreSQL database for this purpose. Any procedural language supported by
6059 PostgreSQL will do (see chapter "Server Programming" in the PostgreSQL manual
6062 =item B<StoreRates> B<false>|B<true>
6064 If set to B<true> (the default), convert counter values to rates. If set to
6065 B<false> counter values are stored as is, i.E<nbsp>e. as an increasing integer
6070 The B<Database> block defines one PostgreSQL database for which to collect
6071 statistics. It accepts a single mandatory argument which specifies the
6072 database name. None of the other options are required. PostgreSQL will use
6073 default values as documented in the section "CONNECTING TO A DATABASE" in the
6074 L<psql(1)> manpage. However, be aware that those defaults may be influenced by
6075 the user collectd is run as and special environment variables. See the manpage
6080 =item B<Interval> I<seconds>
6082 Specify the interval with which the database should be queried. The default is
6083 to use the global B<Interval> setting.
6085 =item B<CommitInterval> I<seconds>
6087 This option may be used for database connections which have "writers" assigned
6088 (see above). If specified, it causes a writer to put several updates into a
6089 single transaction. This transaction will last for the specified amount of
6090 time. By default, each update will be executed in a separate transaction. Each
6091 transaction generates a fair amount of overhead which can, thus, be reduced by
6092 activating this option. The draw-back is, that data covering the specified
6093 amount of time will be lost, for example, if a single statement within the
6094 transaction fails or if the database server crashes.
6096 =item B<Instance> I<name>
6098 Specify the plugin instance name that should be used instead of the database
6099 name (which is the default, if this option has not been specified). This
6100 allows one to query multiple databases of the same name on the same host (e.g.
6101 when running multiple database server versions in parallel).
6102 The plugin instance name can also be set from the query result using
6103 the B<PluginInstanceFrom> option in B<Query> block.
6105 =item B<Host> I<hostname>
6107 Specify the hostname or IP of the PostgreSQL server to connect to. If the
6108 value begins with a slash, it is interpreted as the directory name in which to
6109 look for the UNIX domain socket.
6111 This option is also used to determine the hostname that is associated with a
6112 collected data set. If it has been omitted or either begins with with a slash
6113 or equals B<localhost> it will be replaced with the global hostname definition
6114 of collectd. Any other value will be passed literally to collectd when
6115 dispatching values. Also see the global B<Hostname> and B<FQDNLookup> options.
6117 =item B<Port> I<port>
6119 Specify the TCP port or the local UNIX domain socket file extension of the
6122 =item B<User> I<username>
6124 Specify the username to be used when connecting to the server.
6126 =item B<Password> I<password>
6128 Specify the password to be used when connecting to the server.
6130 =item B<ExpireDelay> I<delay>
6132 Skip expired values in query output.
6134 =item B<SSLMode> I<disable>|I<allow>|I<prefer>|I<require>
6136 Specify whether to use an SSL connection when contacting the server. The
6137 following modes are supported:
6143 Do not use SSL at all.
6147 First, try to connect without using SSL. If that fails, try using SSL.
6149 =item I<prefer> (default)
6151 First, try to connect using SSL. If that fails, try without using SSL.
6159 =item B<Instance> I<name>
6161 Specify the plugin instance name that should be used instead of the database
6162 name (which is the default, if this option has not been specified). This
6163 allows one to query multiple databases of the same name on the same host (e.g.
6164 when running multiple database server versions in parallel).
6166 =item B<KRBSrvName> I<kerberos_service_name>
6168 Specify the Kerberos service name to use when authenticating with Kerberos 5
6169 or GSSAPI. See the sections "Kerberos authentication" and "GSSAPI" of the
6170 B<PostgreSQL Documentation> for details.
6172 =item B<Service> I<service_name>
6174 Specify the PostgreSQL service name to use for additional parameters. That
6175 service has to be defined in F<pg_service.conf> and holds additional
6176 connection parameters. See the section "The Connection Service File" in the
6177 B<PostgreSQL Documentation> for details.
6179 =item B<Query> I<query>
6181 Specifies a I<query> which should be executed in the context of the database
6182 connection. This may be any of the predefined or user-defined queries. If no
6183 such option is given, it defaults to "backends", "transactions", "queries",
6184 "query_plans", "table_states", "disk_io" and "disk_usage" (unless a B<Writer>
6185 has been specified). Else, the specified queries are used only.
6187 =item B<Writer> I<writer>
6189 Assigns the specified I<writer> backend to the database connection. This
6190 causes all collected data to be send to the database using the settings
6191 defined in the writer configuration (see the section "FILTER CONFIGURATION"
6192 below for details on how to selectively send data to certain plugins).
6194 Each writer will register a flush callback which may be used when having long
6195 transactions enabled (see the B<CommitInterval> option above). When issuing
6196 the B<FLUSH> command (see L<collectd-unixsock(5)> for details) the current
6197 transaction will be committed right away. Two different kinds of flush
6198 callbacks are available with the C<postgresql> plugin:
6204 Flush all writer backends.
6206 =item B<postgresql->I<database>
6208 Flush all writers of the specified I<database> only.
6214 =head2 Plugin C<powerdns>
6216 The C<powerdns> plugin queries statistics from an authoritative PowerDNS
6217 nameserver and/or a PowerDNS recursor. Since both offer a wide variety of
6218 values, many of which are probably meaningless to most users, but may be useful
6219 for some. So you may chose which values to collect, but if you don't, some
6220 reasonable defaults will be collected.
6223 <Server "server_name">
6225 Collect "udp-answers" "udp-queries"
6226 Socket "/var/run/pdns.controlsocket"
6228 <Recursor "recursor_name">
6230 Collect "cache-hits" "cache-misses"
6231 Socket "/var/run/pdns_recursor.controlsocket"
6233 LocalSocket "/opt/collectd/var/run/collectd-powerdns"
6238 =item B<Server> and B<Recursor> block
6240 The B<Server> block defines one authoritative server to query, the B<Recursor>
6241 does the same for an recursing server. The possible options in both blocks are
6242 the same, though. The argument defines a name for the serverE<nbsp>/ recursor
6247 =item B<Collect> I<Field>
6249 Using the B<Collect> statement you can select which values to collect. Here,
6250 you specify the name of the values as used by the PowerDNS servers, e.E<nbsp>g.
6251 C<dlg-only-drops>, C<answers10-100>.
6253 The method of getting the values differs for B<Server> and B<Recursor> blocks:
6254 When querying the server a C<SHOW *> command is issued in any case, because
6255 that's the only way of getting multiple values out of the server at once.
6256 collectd then picks out the values you have selected. When querying the
6257 recursor, a command is generated to query exactly these values. So if you
6258 specify invalid fields when querying the recursor, a syntax error may be
6259 returned by the daemon and collectd may not collect any values at all.
6261 If no B<Collect> statement is given, the following B<Server> values will be
6268 =item packetcache-hit
6270 =item packetcache-miss
6272 =item packetcache-size
6274 =item query-cache-hit
6276 =item query-cache-miss
6278 =item recursing-answers
6280 =item recursing-questions
6292 The following B<Recursor> values will be collected by default:
6296 =item noerror-answers
6298 =item nxdomain-answers
6300 =item servfail-answers
6318 Please note that up to that point collectd doesn't know what values are
6319 available on the server and values that are added do not need a change of the
6320 mechanism so far. However, the values must be mapped to collectd's naming
6321 scheme, which is done using a lookup table that lists all known values. If
6322 values are added in the future and collectd does not know about them, you will
6323 get an error much like this:
6325 powerdns plugin: submit: Not found in lookup table: foobar = 42
6327 In this case please file a bug report with the collectd team.
6329 =item B<Socket> I<Path>
6331 Configures the path to the UNIX domain socket to be used when connecting to the
6332 daemon. By default C<${localstatedir}/run/pdns.controlsocket> will be used for
6333 an authoritative server and C<${localstatedir}/run/pdns_recursor.controlsocket>
6334 will be used for the recursor.
6338 =item B<LocalSocket> I<Path>
6340 Querying the recursor is done using UDP. When using UDP over UNIX domain
6341 sockets, the client socket needs a name in the file system, too. You can set
6342 this local name to I<Path> using the B<LocalSocket> option. The default is
6343 C<I<prefix>/var/run/collectd-powerdns>.
6347 =head2 Plugin C<processes>
6351 =item B<Process> I<Name>
6353 Select more detailed statistics of processes matching this name. The statistics
6354 collected for these selected processes are size of the resident segment size
6355 (RSS), user- and system-time used, number of processes and number of threads,
6356 io data (where available) and minor and major pagefaults.
6358 Some platforms have a limit on the length of process names. I<Name> must stay
6361 =item B<ProcessMatch> I<name> I<regex>
6363 Similar to the B<Process> option this allows one to select more detailed
6364 statistics of processes matching the specified I<regex> (see L<regex(7)> for
6365 details). The statistics of all matching processes are summed up and
6366 dispatched to the daemon using the specified I<name> as an identifier. This
6367 allows one to "group" several processes together. I<name> must not contain
6370 =item B<CollectContextSwitch> I<Boolean>
6372 Collect context switch of the process.
6376 =head2 Plugin C<protocols>
6378 Collects a lot of information about various network protocols, such as I<IP>,
6379 I<TCP>, I<UDP>, etc.
6381 Available configuration options:
6385 =item B<Value> I<Selector>
6387 Selects whether or not to select a specific value. The string being matched is
6388 of the form "I<Protocol>:I<ValueName>", where I<Protocol> will be used as the
6389 plugin instance and I<ValueName> will be used as type instance. An example of
6390 the string being used would be C<Tcp:RetransSegs>.
6392 You can use regular expressions to match a large number of values with just one
6393 configuration option. To select all "extended" I<TCP> values, you could use the
6394 following statement:
6398 Whether only matched values are selected or all matched values are ignored
6399 depends on the B<IgnoreSelected>. By default, only matched values are selected.
6400 If no value is configured at all, all values will be selected.
6402 =item B<IgnoreSelected> B<true>|B<false>
6404 If set to B<true>, inverts the selection made by B<Value>, i.E<nbsp>e. all
6405 matching values will be ignored.
6409 =head2 Plugin C<python>
6411 This plugin embeds a Python-interpreter into collectd and provides an interface
6412 to collectd's plugin system. See L<collectd-python(5)> for its documentation.
6414 =head2 Plugin C<routeros>
6416 The C<routeros> plugin connects to a device running I<RouterOS>, the
6417 Linux-based operating system for routers by I<MikroTik>. The plugin uses
6418 I<librouteros> to connect and reads information about the interfaces and
6419 wireless connections of the device. The configuration supports querying
6424 Host "router0.example.com"
6427 CollectInterface true
6432 Host "router1.example.com"
6435 CollectInterface true
6436 CollectRegistrationTable true
6442 As you can see above, the configuration of the I<routeros> plugin consists of
6443 one or more B<E<lt>RouterE<gt>> blocks. Within each block, the following
6444 options are understood:
6448 =item B<Host> I<Host>
6450 Hostname or IP-address of the router to connect to.
6452 =item B<Port> I<Port>
6454 Port name or port number used when connecting. If left unspecified, the default
6455 will be chosen by I<librouteros>, currently "8728". This option expects a
6456 string argument, even when a numeric port number is given.
6458 =item B<User> I<User>
6460 Use the user name I<User> to authenticate. Defaults to "admin".
6462 =item B<Password> I<Password>
6464 Set the password used to authenticate.
6466 =item B<CollectInterface> B<true>|B<false>
6468 When set to B<true>, interface statistics will be collected for all interfaces
6469 present on the device. Defaults to B<false>.
6471 =item B<CollectRegistrationTable> B<true>|B<false>
6473 When set to B<true>, information about wireless LAN connections will be
6474 collected. Defaults to B<false>.
6476 =item B<CollectCPULoad> B<true>|B<false>
6478 When set to B<true>, information about the CPU usage will be collected. The
6479 number is a dimensionless value where zero indicates no CPU usage at all.
6480 Defaults to B<false>.
6482 =item B<CollectMemory> B<true>|B<false>
6484 When enabled, the amount of used and free memory will be collected. How used
6485 memory is calculated is unknown, for example whether or not caches are counted
6487 Defaults to B<false>.
6489 =item B<CollectDF> B<true>|B<false>
6491 When enabled, the amount of used and free disk space will be collected.
6492 Defaults to B<false>.
6494 =item B<CollectDisk> B<true>|B<false>
6496 When enabled, the number of sectors written and bad blocks will be collected.
6497 Defaults to B<false>.
6501 =head2 Plugin C<redis>
6503 The I<Redis plugin> connects to one or more Redis servers and gathers
6504 information about each server's state. For each server there is a I<Node> block
6505 which configures the connection parameters for this node.
6512 <Query "LLEN myqueue">
6519 The information shown in the synopsis above is the I<default configuration>
6520 which is used by the plugin if no configuration is present.
6524 =item B<Node> I<Nodename>
6526 The B<Node> block identifies a new Redis node, that is a new Redis instance
6527 running in an specified host and port. The name for node is a canonical
6528 identifier which is used as I<plugin instance>. It is limited to
6529 64E<nbsp>characters in length.
6531 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
6533 The B<Host> option is the hostname or IP-address where the Redis instance is
6536 =item B<Port> I<Port>
6538 The B<Port> option is the TCP port on which the Redis instance accepts
6539 connections. Either a service name of a port number may be given. Please note
6540 that numerical port numbers must be given as a string, too.
6542 =item B<Password> I<Password>
6544 Use I<Password> to authenticate when connecting to I<Redis>.
6546 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
6548 The B<Timeout> option set the socket timeout for node response. Since the Redis
6549 read function is blocking, you should keep this value as low as possible. Keep
6550 in mind that the sum of all B<Timeout> values for all B<Nodes> should be lower
6551 than B<Interval> defined globally.
6553 =item B<Query> I<Querystring>
6555 The B<Query> block identifies a query to execute against the redis server.
6556 There may be an arbitrary number of queries to execute.
6558 =item B<Type> I<Collectd type>
6560 Within a query definition, a valid collectd type to use as when submitting
6561 the result of the query. When not supplied, will default to B<gauge>.
6563 =item B<Instance> I<Type instance>
6565 Within a query definition, an optional type instance to use when submitting
6566 the result of the query. When not supplied will default to the escaped
6567 command, up to 64 chars.
6571 =head2 Plugin C<rrdcached>
6573 The C<rrdcached> plugin uses the RRDtool accelerator daemon, L<rrdcached(1)>,
6574 to store values to RRD files in an efficient manner. The combination of the
6575 C<rrdcached> B<plugin> and the C<rrdcached> B<daemon> is very similar to the
6576 way the C<rrdtool> plugin works (see below). The added abstraction layer
6577 provides a number of benefits, though: Because the cache is not within
6578 C<collectd> anymore, it does not need to be flushed when C<collectd> is to be
6579 restarted. This results in much shorter (if any) gaps in graphs, especially
6580 under heavy load. Also, the C<rrdtool> command line utility is aware of the
6581 daemon so that it can flush values to disk automatically when needed. This
6582 allows one to integrate automated flushing of values into graphing solutions
6585 There are disadvantages, though: The daemon may reside on a different host, so
6586 it may not be possible for C<collectd> to create the appropriate RRD files
6587 anymore. And even if C<rrdcached> runs on the same host, it may run in a
6588 different base directory, so relative paths may do weird stuff if you're not
6591 So the B<recommended configuration> is to let C<collectd> and C<rrdcached> run
6592 on the same host, communicating via a UNIX domain socket. The B<DataDir>
6593 setting should be set to an absolute path, so that a changed base directory
6594 does not result in RRD files being createdE<nbsp>/ expected in the wrong place.
6598 =item B<DaemonAddress> I<Address>
6600 Address of the daemon as understood by the C<rrdc_connect> function of the RRD
6601 library. See L<rrdcached(1)> for details. Example:
6603 <Plugin "rrdcached">
6604 DaemonAddress "unix:/var/run/rrdcached.sock"
6607 =item B<DataDir> I<Directory>
6609 Set the base directory in which the RRD files reside. If this is a relative
6610 path, it is relative to the working base directory of the C<rrdcached> daemon!
6611 Use of an absolute path is recommended.
6613 =item B<CreateFiles> B<true>|B<false>
6615 Enables or disables the creation of RRD files. If the daemon is not running
6616 locally, or B<DataDir> is set to a relative path, this will not work as
6617 expected. Default is B<true>.
6619 =item B<CreateFilesAsync> B<false>|B<true>
6621 When enabled, new RRD files are enabled asynchronously, using a separate thread
6622 that runs in the background. This prevents writes to block, which is a problem
6623 especially when many hundreds of files need to be created at once. However,
6624 since the purpose of creating the files asynchronously is I<not> to block until
6625 the file is available, values before the file is available will be discarded.
6626 When disabled (the default) files are created synchronously, blocking for a
6627 short while, while the file is being written.
6629 =item B<StepSize> I<Seconds>
6631 B<Force> the stepsize of newly created RRD-files. Ideally (and per default)
6632 this setting is unset and the stepsize is set to the interval in which the data
6633 is collected. Do not use this option unless you absolutely have to for some
6634 reason. Setting this option may cause problems with the C<snmp plugin>, the
6635 C<exec plugin> or when the daemon is set up to receive data from other hosts.
6637 =item B<HeartBeat> I<Seconds>
6639 B<Force> the heartbeat of newly created RRD-files. This setting should be unset
6640 in which case the heartbeat is set to twice the B<StepSize> which should equal
6641 the interval in which data is collected. Do not set this option unless you have
6642 a very good reason to do so.
6644 =item B<RRARows> I<NumRows>
6646 The C<rrdtool plugin> calculates the number of PDPs per CDP based on the
6647 B<StepSize>, this setting and a timespan. This plugin creates RRD-files with
6648 three times five RRAs, i. e. five RRAs with the CFs B<MIN>, B<AVERAGE>, and
6649 B<MAX>. The five RRAs are optimized for graphs covering one hour, one day, one
6650 week, one month, and one year.
6652 So for each timespan, it calculates how many PDPs need to be consolidated into
6653 one CDP by calculating:
6654 number of PDPs = timespan / (stepsize * rrarows)
6656 Bottom line is, set this no smaller than the width of you graphs in pixels. The
6659 =item B<RRATimespan> I<Seconds>
6661 Adds an RRA-timespan, given in seconds. Use this option multiple times to have
6662 more then one RRA. If this option is never used, the built-in default of (3600,
6663 86400, 604800, 2678400, 31622400) is used.
6665 For more information on how RRA-sizes are calculated see B<RRARows> above.
6667 =item B<XFF> I<Factor>
6669 Set the "XFiles Factor". The default is 0.1. If unsure, don't set this option.
6670 I<Factor> must be in the range C<[0.0-1.0)>, i.e. between zero (inclusive) and
6673 =item B<CollectStatistics> B<false>|B<true>
6675 When set to B<true>, various statistics about the I<rrdcached> daemon will be
6676 collected, with "rrdcached" as the I<plugin name>. Defaults to B<false>.
6678 Statistics are read via I<rrdcached>s socket using the STATS command.
6679 See L<rrdcached(1)> for details.
6683 =head2 Plugin C<rrdtool>
6685 You can use the settings B<StepSize>, B<HeartBeat>, B<RRARows>, and B<XFF> to
6686 fine-tune your RRD-files. Please read L<rrdcreate(1)> if you encounter problems
6687 using these settings. If you don't want to dive into the depths of RRDtool, you
6688 can safely ignore these settings.
6692 =item B<DataDir> I<Directory>
6694 Set the directory to store RRD files under. By default RRD files are generated
6695 beneath the daemon's working directory, i.e. the B<BaseDir>.
6697 =item B<CreateFilesAsync> B<false>|B<true>
6699 When enabled, new RRD files are enabled asynchronously, using a separate thread
6700 that runs in the background. This prevents writes to block, which is a problem
6701 especially when many hundreds of files need to be created at once. However,
6702 since the purpose of creating the files asynchronously is I<not> to block until
6703 the file is available, values before the file is available will be discarded.
6704 When disabled (the default) files are created synchronously, blocking for a
6705 short while, while the file is being written.
6707 =item B<StepSize> I<Seconds>
6709 B<Force> the stepsize of newly created RRD-files. Ideally (and per default)
6710 this setting is unset and the stepsize is set to the interval in which the data
6711 is collected. Do not use this option unless you absolutely have to for some
6712 reason. Setting this option may cause problems with the C<snmp plugin>, the
6713 C<exec plugin> or when the daemon is set up to receive data from other hosts.
6715 =item B<HeartBeat> I<Seconds>
6717 B<Force> the heartbeat of newly created RRD-files. This setting should be unset
6718 in which case the heartbeat is set to twice the B<StepSize> which should equal
6719 the interval in which data is collected. Do not set this option unless you have
6720 a very good reason to do so.
6722 =item B<RRARows> I<NumRows>
6724 The C<rrdtool plugin> calculates the number of PDPs per CDP based on the
6725 B<StepSize>, this setting and a timespan. This plugin creates RRD-files with
6726 three times five RRAs, i.e. five RRAs with the CFs B<MIN>, B<AVERAGE>, and
6727 B<MAX>. The five RRAs are optimized for graphs covering one hour, one day, one
6728 week, one month, and one year.
6730 So for each timespan, it calculates how many PDPs need to be consolidated into
6731 one CDP by calculating:
6732 number of PDPs = timespan / (stepsize * rrarows)
6734 Bottom line is, set this no smaller than the width of you graphs in pixels. The
6737 =item B<RRATimespan> I<Seconds>
6739 Adds an RRA-timespan, given in seconds. Use this option multiple times to have
6740 more then one RRA. If this option is never used, the built-in default of (3600,
6741 86400, 604800, 2678400, 31622400) is used.
6743 For more information on how RRA-sizes are calculated see B<RRARows> above.
6745 =item B<XFF> I<Factor>
6747 Set the "XFiles Factor". The default is 0.1. If unsure, don't set this option.
6748 I<Factor> must be in the range C<[0.0-1.0)>, i.e. between zero (inclusive) and
6751 =item B<CacheFlush> I<Seconds>
6753 When the C<rrdtool> plugin uses a cache (by setting B<CacheTimeout>, see below)
6754 it writes all values for a certain RRD-file if the oldest value is older than
6755 (or equal to) the number of seconds specified. If some RRD-file is not updated
6756 anymore for some reason (the computer was shut down, the network is broken,
6757 etc.) some values may still be in the cache. If B<CacheFlush> is set, then the
6758 entire cache is searched for entries older than B<CacheTimeout> seconds and
6759 written to disk every I<Seconds> seconds. Since this is kind of expensive and
6760 does nothing under normal circumstances, this value should not be too small.
6761 900 seconds might be a good value, though setting this to 7200 seconds doesn't
6762 normally do much harm either.
6764 =item B<CacheTimeout> I<Seconds>
6766 If this option is set to a value greater than zero, the C<rrdtool plugin> will
6767 save values in a cache, as described above. Writing multiple values at once
6768 reduces IO-operations and thus lessens the load produced by updating the files.
6769 The trade off is that the graphs kind of "drag behind" and that more memory is
6772 =item B<WritesPerSecond> I<Updates>
6774 When collecting many statistics with collectd and the C<rrdtool> plugin, you
6775 will run serious performance problems. The B<CacheFlush> setting and the
6776 internal update queue assert that collectd continues to work just fine even
6777 under heavy load, but the system may become very unresponsive and slow. This is
6778 a problem especially if you create graphs from the RRD files on the same
6779 machine, for example using the C<graph.cgi> script included in the
6780 C<contrib/collection3/> directory.
6782 This setting is designed for very large setups. Setting this option to a value
6783 between 25 and 80 updates per second, depending on your hardware, will leave
6784 the server responsive enough to draw graphs even while all the cached values
6785 are written to disk. Flushed values, i.E<nbsp>e. values that are forced to disk
6786 by the B<FLUSH> command, are B<not> effected by this limit. They are still
6787 written as fast as possible, so that web frontends have up to date data when
6790 For example: If you have 100,000 RRD files and set B<WritesPerSecond> to 30
6791 updates per second, writing all values to disk will take approximately
6792 56E<nbsp>minutes. Together with the flushing ability that's integrated into
6793 "collection3" you'll end up with a responsive and fast system, up to date
6794 graphs and basically a "backup" of your values every hour.
6796 =item B<RandomTimeout> I<Seconds>
6798 When set, the actual timeout for each value is chosen randomly between
6799 I<CacheTimeout>-I<RandomTimeout> and I<CacheTimeout>+I<RandomTimeout>. The
6800 intention is to avoid high load situations that appear when many values timeout
6801 at the same time. This is especially a problem shortly after the daemon starts,
6802 because all values were added to the internal cache at roughly the same time.
6806 =head2 Plugin C<sensors>
6808 The I<Sensors plugin> uses B<lm_sensors> to retrieve sensor-values. This means
6809 that all the needed modules have to be loaded and lm_sensors has to be
6810 configured (most likely by editing F</etc/sensors.conf>. Read
6811 L<sensors.conf(5)> for details.
6813 The B<lm_sensors> homepage can be found at
6814 L<http://secure.netroedge.com/~lm78/>.
6818 =item B<SensorConfigFile> I<File>
6820 Read the I<lm_sensors> configuration from I<File>. When unset (recommended),
6821 the library's default will be used.
6823 =item B<Sensor> I<chip-bus-address/type-feature>
6825 Selects the name of the sensor which you want to collect or ignore, depending
6826 on the B<IgnoreSelected> below. For example, the option "B<Sensor>
6827 I<it8712-isa-0290/voltage-in1>" will cause collectd to gather data for the
6828 voltage sensor I<in1> of the I<it8712> on the isa bus at the address 0290.
6830 =item B<IgnoreSelected> I<true>|I<false>
6832 If no configuration if given, the B<sensors>-plugin will collect data from all
6833 sensors. This may not be practical, especially for uninteresting sensors.
6834 Thus, you can use the B<Sensor>-option to pick the sensors you're interested
6835 in. Sometimes, however, it's easier/preferred to collect all sensors I<except> a
6836 few ones. This option enables you to do that: By setting B<IgnoreSelected> to
6837 I<true> the effect of B<Sensor> is inverted: All selected sensors are ignored
6838 and all other sensors are collected.
6840 =item B<UseLabels> I<true>|I<false>
6842 Configures how sensor readings are reported. When set to I<true>, sensor
6843 readings are reported using their descriptive label (e.g. "VCore"). When set to
6844 I<false> (the default) the sensor name is used ("in0").
6848 =head2 Plugin C<sigrok>
6850 The I<sigrok plugin> uses I<libsigrok> to retrieve measurements from any device
6851 supported by the L<sigrok|http://sigrok.org/> project.
6857 <Device "AC Voltage">
6862 <Device "Sound Level">
6863 Driver "cem-dt-885x"
6870 =item B<LogLevel> B<0-5>
6872 The I<sigrok> logging level to pass on to the I<collectd> log, as a number
6873 between B<0> and B<5> (inclusive). These levels correspond to C<None>,
6874 C<Errors>, C<Warnings>, C<Informational>, C<Debug >and C<Spew>, respectively.
6875 The default is B<2> (C<Warnings>). The I<sigrok> log messages, regardless of
6876 their level, are always submitted to I<collectd> at its INFO log level.
6878 =item E<lt>B<Device> I<Name>E<gt>
6880 A sigrok-supported device, uniquely identified by this section's options. The
6881 I<Name> is passed to I<collectd> as the I<plugin instance>.
6883 =item B<Driver> I<DriverName>
6885 The sigrok driver to use for this device.
6887 =item B<Conn> I<ConnectionSpec>
6889 If the device cannot be auto-discovered, or more than one might be discovered
6890 by the driver, I<ConnectionSpec> specifies the connection string to the device.
6891 It can be of the form of a device path (e.g.E<nbsp>C</dev/ttyUSB2>), or, in
6892 case of a non-serial USB-connected device, the USB I<VendorID>B<.>I<ProductID>
6893 separated by a period (e.g.E<nbsp>C<0403.6001>). A USB device can also be
6894 specified as I<Bus>B<.>I<Address> (e.g.E<nbsp>C<1.41>).
6896 =item B<SerialComm> I<SerialSpec>
6898 For serial devices with non-standard port settings, this option can be used
6899 to specify them in a form understood by I<sigrok>, e.g.E<nbsp>C<9600/8n1>.
6900 This should not be necessary; drivers know how to communicate with devices they
6903 =item B<MinimumInterval> I<Seconds>
6905 Specifies the minimum time between measurement dispatches to I<collectd>, in
6906 seconds. Since some I<sigrok> supported devices can acquire measurements many
6907 times per second, it may be necessary to throttle these. For example, the
6908 I<RRD plugin> cannot process writes more than once per second.
6910 The default B<MinimumInterval> is B<0>, meaning measurements received from the
6911 device are always dispatched to I<collectd>. When throttled, unused
6912 measurements are discarded.
6916 =head2 Plugin C<smart>
6918 The C<smart> plugin collects SMART information from physical
6919 disks. Values collectd include temperature, power cycle count, poweron
6920 time and bad sectors. Also, all SMART attributes are collected along
6921 with the normalized current value, the worst value, the threshold and
6922 a human readable value.
6924 Using the following two options you can ignore some disks or configure the
6925 collection only of specific disks.
6929 =item B<Disk> I<Name>
6931 Select the disk I<Name>. Whether it is collected or ignored depends on the
6932 B<IgnoreSelected> setting, see below. As with other plugins that use the
6933 daemon's ignorelist functionality, a string that starts and ends with a slash
6934 is interpreted as a regular expression. Examples:
6939 =item B<IgnoreSelected> B<true>|B<false>
6941 Sets whether selected disks, i.E<nbsp>e. the ones matches by any of the B<Disk>
6942 statements, are ignored or if all other disks are ignored. The behavior
6943 (hopefully) is intuitive: If no B<Disk> option is configured, all disks are
6944 collected. If at least one B<Disk> option is given and no B<IgnoreSelected> or
6945 set to B<false>, B<only> matching disks will be collected. If B<IgnoreSelected>
6946 is set to B<true>, all disks are collected B<except> the ones matched.
6948 =item B<IgnoreSleepMode> B<true>|B<false>
6950 Normally, the C<smart> plugin will ignore disks that are reported to be asleep.
6951 This option disables the sleep mode check and allows the plugin to collect data
6952 from these disks anyway. This is useful in cases where libatasmart mistakenly
6953 reports disks as asleep because it has not been updated to incorporate support
6954 for newer idle states in the ATA spec.
6956 =item B<UseSerial> B<true>|B<false>
6958 A disk's kernel name (e.g., sda) can change from one boot to the next. If this
6959 option is enabled, the C<smart> plugin will use the disk's serial number (e.g.,
6960 HGST_HUH728080ALE600_2EJ8VH8X) instead of the kernel name as the key for
6961 storing data. This ensures that the data for a given disk will be kept together
6962 even if the kernel name changes.
6966 =head2 Plugin C<snmp>
6968 Since the configuration of the C<snmp plugin> is a little more complicated than
6969 other plugins, its documentation has been moved to an own manpage,
6970 L<collectd-snmp(5)>. Please see there for details.
6972 =head2 Plugin C<statsd>
6974 The I<statsd plugin> listens to a UDP socket, reads "events" in the statsd
6975 protocol and dispatches rates or other aggregates of these numbers
6978 The plugin implements the I<Counter>, I<Timer>, I<Gauge> and I<Set> types which
6979 are dispatched as the I<collectd> types C<derive>, C<latency>, C<gauge> and
6980 C<objects> respectively.
6982 The following configuration options are valid:
6986 =item B<Host> I<Host>
6988 Bind to the hostname / address I<Host>. By default, the plugin will bind to the
6989 "any" address, i.e. accept packets sent to any of the hosts addresses.
6991 =item B<Port> I<Port>
6993 UDP port to listen to. This can be either a service name or a port number.
6994 Defaults to C<8125>.
6996 =item B<DeleteCounters> B<false>|B<true>
6998 =item B<DeleteTimers> B<false>|B<true>
7000 =item B<DeleteGauges> B<false>|B<true>
7002 =item B<DeleteSets> B<false>|B<true>
7004 These options control what happens if metrics are not updated in an interval.
7005 If set to B<False>, the default, metrics are dispatched unchanged, i.e. the
7006 rate of counters and size of sets will be zero, timers report C<NaN> and gauges
7007 are unchanged. If set to B<True>, the such metrics are not dispatched and
7008 removed from the internal cache.
7010 =item B<CounterSum> B<false>|B<true>
7012 When enabled, creates a C<count> metric which reports the change since the last
7013 read. This option primarily exists for compatibility with the I<statsd>
7014 implementation by Etsy.
7016 =item B<TimerPercentile> I<Percent>
7018 Calculate and dispatch the configured percentile, i.e. compute the latency, so
7019 that I<Percent> of all reported timers are smaller than or equal to the
7020 computed latency. This is useful for cutting off the long tail latency, as it's
7021 often done in I<Service Level Agreements> (SLAs).
7023 Different percentiles can be calculated by setting this option several times.
7024 If none are specified, no percentiles are calculated / dispatched.
7026 =item B<TimerLower> B<false>|B<true>
7028 =item B<TimerUpper> B<false>|B<true>
7030 =item B<TimerSum> B<false>|B<true>
7032 =item B<TimerCount> B<false>|B<true>
7034 Calculate and dispatch various values out of I<Timer> metrics received during
7035 an interval. If set to B<False>, the default, these values aren't calculated /
7040 =head2 Plugin C<swap>
7042 The I<Swap plugin> collects information about used and available swap space. On
7043 I<Linux> and I<Solaris>, the following options are available:
7047 =item B<ReportByDevice> B<false>|B<true>
7049 Configures how to report physical swap devices. If set to B<false> (the
7050 default), the summary over all swap devices is reported only, i.e. the globally
7051 used and available space over all devices. If B<true> is configured, the used
7052 and available space of each device will be reported separately.
7054 This option is only available if the I<Swap plugin> can read C</proc/swaps>
7055 (under Linux) or use the L<swapctl(2)> mechanism (under I<Solaris>).
7057 =item B<ReportBytes> B<false>|B<true>
7059 When enabled, the I<swap I/O> is reported in bytes. When disabled, the default,
7060 I<swap I/O> is reported in pages. This option is available under Linux only.
7062 =item B<ValuesAbsolute> B<true>|B<false>
7064 Enables or disables reporting of absolute swap metrics, i.e. number of I<bytes>
7065 available and used. Defaults to B<true>.
7067 =item B<ValuesPercentage> B<false>|B<true>
7069 Enables or disables reporting of relative swap metrics, i.e. I<percent>
7070 available and free. Defaults to B<false>.
7072 This is useful for deploying I<collectd> in a heterogeneous environment, where
7073 swap sizes differ and you want to specify generic thresholds or similar.
7077 =head2 Plugin C<syslog>
7081 =item B<LogLevel> B<debug|info|notice|warning|err>
7083 Sets the log-level. If, for example, set to B<notice>, then all events with
7084 severity B<notice>, B<warning>, or B<err> will be submitted to the
7087 Please note that B<debug> is only available if collectd has been compiled with
7090 =item B<NotifyLevel> B<OKAY>|B<WARNING>|B<FAILURE>
7092 Controls which notifications should be sent to syslog. The default behaviour is
7093 not to send any. Less severe notifications always imply logging more severe
7094 notifications: Setting this to B<OKAY> means all notifications will be sent to
7095 syslog, setting this to B<WARNING> will send B<WARNING> and B<FAILURE>
7096 notifications but will dismiss B<OKAY> notifications. Setting this option to
7097 B<FAILURE> will only send failures to syslog.
7101 =head2 Plugin C<table>
7103 The C<table plugin> provides generic means to parse tabular data and dispatch
7104 user specified values. Values are selected based on column numbers. For
7105 example, this plugin may be used to get values from the Linux L<proc(5)>
7106 filesystem or CSV (comma separated values) files.
7109 <Table "/proc/slabinfo">
7114 InstancePrefix "active_objs"
7120 InstancePrefix "objperslab"
7127 The configuration consists of one or more B<Table> blocks, each of which
7128 configures one file to parse. Within each B<Table> block, there are one or
7129 more B<Result> blocks, which configure which data to select and how to
7132 The following options are available inside a B<Table> block:
7136 =item B<Instance> I<instance>
7138 If specified, I<instance> is used as the plugin instance. So, in the above
7139 example, the plugin name C<table-slabinfo> would be used. If omitted, the
7140 filename of the table is used instead, with all special characters replaced
7141 with an underscore (C<_>).
7143 =item B<Separator> I<string>
7145 Any character of I<string> is interpreted as a delimiter between the different
7146 columns of the table. A sequence of two or more contiguous delimiters in the
7147 table is considered to be a single delimiter, i.E<nbsp>e. there cannot be any
7148 empty columns. The plugin uses the L<strtok_r(3)> function to parse the lines
7149 of a table - see its documentation for more details. This option is mandatory.
7151 A horizontal tab, newline and carriage return may be specified by C<\\t>,
7152 C<\\n> and C<\\r> respectively. Please note that the double backslashes are
7153 required because of collectd's config parsing.
7157 The following options are available inside a B<Result> block:
7161 =item B<Type> I<type>
7163 Sets the type used to dispatch the values to the daemon. Detailed information
7164 about types and their configuration can be found in L<types.db(5)>. This
7165 option is mandatory.
7167 =item B<InstancePrefix> I<prefix>
7169 If specified, prepend I<prefix> to the type instance. If omitted, only the
7170 B<InstancesFrom> option is considered for the type instance.
7172 =item B<InstancesFrom> I<column0> [I<column1> ...]
7174 If specified, the content of the given columns (identified by the column
7175 number starting at zero) will be used to create the type instance for each
7176 row. Multiple values (and the instance prefix) will be joined together with
7177 dashes (I<->) as separation character. If omitted, only the B<InstancePrefix>
7178 option is considered for the type instance.
7180 The plugin itself does not check whether or not all built instances are
7181 different. It’s your responsibility to assure that each is unique. This is
7182 especially true, if you do not specify B<InstancesFrom>: B<You> have to make
7183 sure that the table only contains one row.
7185 If neither B<InstancePrefix> nor B<InstancesFrom> is given, the type instance
7188 =item B<ValuesFrom> I<column0> [I<column1> ...]
7190 Specifies the columns (identified by the column numbers starting at zero)
7191 whose content is used as the actual data for the data sets that are dispatched
7192 to the daemon. How many such columns you need is determined by the B<Type>
7193 setting above. If you specify too many or not enough columns, the plugin will
7194 complain about that and no data will be submitted to the daemon. The plugin
7195 uses L<strtoll(3)> and L<strtod(3)> to parse counter and gauge values
7196 respectively, so anything supported by those functions is supported by the
7197 plugin as well. This option is mandatory.
7201 =head2 Plugin C<tail>
7203 The C<tail plugin> follows logfiles, just like L<tail(1)> does, parses
7204 each line and dispatches found values. What is matched can be configured by the
7205 user using (extended) regular expressions, as described in L<regex(7)>.
7208 <File "/var/log/exim4/mainlog">
7212 Regex "S=([1-9][0-9]*)"
7218 Regex "\\<R=local_user\\>"
7219 ExcludeRegex "\\<R=local_user\\>.*mail_spool defer"
7222 Instance "local_user"
7225 Regex "l=([0-9]*\\.[0-9]*)"
7226 <DSType "Distribution">
7236 The config consists of one or more B<File> blocks, each of which configures one
7237 logfile to parse. Within each B<File> block, there are one or more B<Match>
7238 blocks, which configure a regular expression to search for.
7240 The B<Instance> option in the B<File> block may be used to set the plugin
7241 instance. So in the above example the plugin name C<tail-foo> would be used.
7242 This plugin instance is for all B<Match> blocks that B<follow> it, until the
7243 next B<Instance> option. This way you can extract several plugin instances from
7244 one logfile, handy when parsing syslog and the like.
7246 The B<Interval> option allows you to define the length of time between reads. If
7247 this is not set, the default Interval will be used.
7249 Each B<Match> block has the following options to describe how the match should
7254 =item B<Regex> I<regex>
7256 Sets the regular expression to use for matching against a line. The first
7257 subexpression has to match something that can be turned into a number by
7258 L<strtoll(3)> or L<strtod(3)>, depending on the value of C<CounterAdd>, see
7259 below. Because B<extended> regular expressions are used, you do not need to use
7260 backslashes for subexpressions! If in doubt, please consult L<regex(7)>. Due to
7261 collectd's config parsing you need to escape backslashes, though. So if you
7262 want to match literal parentheses you need to do the following:
7264 Regex "SPAM \\(Score: (-?[0-9]+\\.[0-9]+)\\)"
7266 =item B<ExcludeRegex> I<regex>
7268 Sets an optional regular expression to use for excluding lines from the match.
7269 An example which excludes all connections from localhost from the match:
7271 ExcludeRegex "127\\.0\\.0\\.1"
7273 =item B<DSType> I<Type>
7275 Sets how the values are cumulated. I<Type> is one of:
7279 =item B<GaugeAverage>
7281 Calculate the average.
7285 Use the smallest number only.
7289 Use the greatest number only.
7293 Use the last number found.
7295 =item B<GaugePersist>
7297 Use the last number found. The number is not reset at the end of an interval.
7298 It is continously reported until another number is matched. This is intended
7299 for cases in which only state changes are reported, for example a thermometer
7300 that only reports the temperature when it changes.
7306 =item B<AbsoluteSet>
7308 The matched number is a counter. Simply I<sets> the internal counter to this
7309 value. Variants exist for C<COUNTER>, C<DERIVE>, and C<ABSOLUTE> data sources.
7317 Add the matched value to the internal counter. In case of B<DeriveAdd>, the
7318 matched number may be negative, which will effectively subtract from the
7327 Increase the internal counter by one. These B<DSType> are the only ones that do
7328 not use the matched subexpression, but simply count the number of matched
7329 lines. Thus, you may use a regular expression without submatch in this case.
7331 =item B<Distribution>
7333 Type to do calculations based on the distribution of values, primarily
7334 calculating percentiles. This is primarily geared towards latency, but can be
7335 used for other metrics as well. The range of values tracked with this setting
7336 must be in the range (0–2^34) and can be fractional. Please note that neither
7337 zero nor 2^34 are inclusive bounds, i.e. zero I<cannot> be handled by a
7340 This option must be used together with the B<Percentile> and/or B<Bucket>
7345 <DSType "Distribution">
7352 =item B<Percentile> I<Percent>
7354 Calculate and dispatch the configured percentile, i.e. compute the value, so
7355 that I<Percent> of all matched values are smaller than or equal to the computed
7358 Metrics are reported with the I<type> B<Type> (the value of the above option)
7359 and the I<type instance> C<[E<lt>InstanceE<gt>-]E<lt>PercentE<gt>>.
7361 This option may be repeated to calculate more than one percentile.
7363 =item B<Bucket> I<lower_bound> I<upper_bound>
7365 Export the number of values (a C<DERIVE>) falling within the given range. Both,
7366 I<lower_bound> and I<upper_bound> may be a fractional number, such as B<0.5>.
7367 Each B<Bucket> option specifies an interval C<(I<lower_bound>,
7368 I<upper_bound>]>, i.e. the range I<excludes> the lower bound and I<includes>
7369 the upper bound. I<lower_bound> and I<upper_bound> may be zero, meaning no
7372 To export the entire (0–inf) range without overlap, use the upper bound of the
7373 previous range as the lower bound of the following range. In other words, use
7374 the following schema:
7384 Metrics are reported with the I<type> C<bucket> and the I<type instance>
7385 C<E<lt>TypeE<gt>[-E<lt>InstanceE<gt>]-E<lt>lower_boundE<gt>_E<lt>upper_boundE<gt>>.
7387 This option may be repeated to calculate more than one rate.
7393 The B<Gauge*> and B<Distribution> types interpret the submatch as a floating
7394 point number, using L<strtod(3)>. The B<Counter*> and B<AbsoluteSet> types
7395 interpret the submatch as an unsigned integer using L<strtoull(3)>. The
7396 B<Derive*> types interpret the submatch as a signed integer using
7397 L<strtoll(3)>. B<CounterInc> and B<DeriveInc> do not use the submatch at all
7398 and it may be omitted in this case.
7400 =item B<Type> I<Type>
7402 Sets the type used to dispatch this value. Detailed information about types and
7403 their configuration can be found in L<types.db(5)>.
7405 =item B<Instance> I<TypeInstance>
7407 This optional setting sets the type instance to use.
7411 =head2 Plugin C<tail_csv>
7413 The I<tail_csv plugin> reads files in the CSV format, e.g. the statistics file
7414 written by I<Snort>.
7419 <Metric "snort-dropped">
7424 <File "/var/log/snort/snort.stats">
7425 Instance "snort-eth0"
7427 Collect "snort-dropped"
7431 The configuration consists of one or more B<Metric> blocks that define an index
7432 into the line of the CSV file and how this value is mapped to I<collectd's>
7433 internal representation. These are followed by one or more B<Instance> blocks
7434 which configure which file to read, in which interval and which metrics to
7439 =item E<lt>B<Metric> I<Name>E<gt>
7441 The B<Metric> block configures a new metric to be extracted from the statistics
7442 file and how it is mapped on I<collectd's> data model. The string I<Name> is
7443 only used inside the B<Instance> blocks to refer to this block, so you can use
7444 one B<Metric> block for multiple CSV files.
7448 =item B<Type> I<Type>
7450 Configures which I<Type> to use when dispatching this metric. Types are defined
7451 in the L<types.db(5)> file, see the appropriate manual page for more
7452 information on specifying types. Only types with a single I<data source> are
7453 supported by the I<tail_csv plugin>. The information whether the value is an
7454 absolute value (i.e. a C<GAUGE>) or a rate (i.e. a C<DERIVE>) is taken from the
7455 I<Type's> definition.
7457 =item B<Instance> I<TypeInstance>
7459 If set, I<TypeInstance> is used to populate the type instance field of the
7460 created value lists. Otherwise, no type instance is used.
7462 =item B<ValueFrom> I<Index>
7464 Configure to read the value from the field with the zero-based index I<Index>.
7465 If the value is parsed as signed integer, unsigned integer or double depends on
7466 the B<Type> setting, see above.
7470 =item E<lt>B<File> I<Path>E<gt>
7472 Each B<File> block represents one CSV file to read. There must be at least one
7473 I<File> block but there can be multiple if you have multiple CSV files.
7477 =item B<Instance> I<PluginInstance>
7479 Sets the I<plugin instance> used when dispatching the values.
7481 =item B<Collect> I<Metric>
7483 Specifies which I<Metric> to collect. This option must be specified at least
7484 once, and you can use this option multiple times to specify more than one
7485 metric to be extracted from this statistic file.
7487 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
7489 Configures the interval in which to read values from this instance / file.
7490 Defaults to the plugin's default interval.
7492 =item B<TimeFrom> I<Index>
7494 Rather than using the local time when dispatching a value, read the timestamp
7495 from the field with the zero-based index I<Index>. The value is interpreted as
7496 seconds since epoch. The value is parsed as a double and may be factional.
7502 =head2 Plugin C<teamspeak2>
7504 The C<teamspeak2 plugin> connects to the query port of a teamspeak2 server and
7505 polls interesting global and virtual server data. The plugin can query only one
7506 physical server but unlimited virtual servers. You can use the following
7507 options to configure it:
7511 =item B<Host> I<hostname/ip>
7513 The hostname or ip which identifies the physical server.
7516 =item B<Port> I<port>
7518 The query port of the physical server. This needs to be a string.
7521 =item B<Server> I<port>
7523 This option has to be added once for every virtual server the plugin should
7524 query. If you want to query the virtual server on port 8767 this is what the
7525 option would look like:
7529 This option, although numeric, needs to be a string, i.E<nbsp>e. you B<must>
7530 use quotes around it! If no such statement is given only global information
7535 =head2 Plugin C<ted>
7537 The I<TED> plugin connects to a device of "The Energy Detective", a device to
7538 measure power consumption. These devices are usually connected to a serial
7539 (RS232) or USB port. The plugin opens a configured device and tries to read the
7540 current energy readings. For more information on TED, visit
7541 L<http://www.theenergydetective.com/>.
7543 Available configuration options:
7547 =item B<Device> I<Path>
7549 Path to the device on which TED is connected. collectd will need read and write
7550 permissions on that file.
7552 Default: B</dev/ttyUSB0>
7554 =item B<Retries> I<Num>
7556 Apparently reading from TED is not that reliable. You can therefore configure a
7557 number of retries here. You only configure the I<retries> here, to if you
7558 specify zero, one reading will be performed (but no retries if that fails); if
7559 you specify three, a maximum of four readings are performed. Negative values
7566 =head2 Plugin C<tcpconns>
7568 The C<tcpconns plugin> counts the number of currently established TCP
7569 connections based on the local port and/or the remote port. Since there may be
7570 a lot of connections the default if to count all connections with a local port,
7571 for which a listening socket is opened. You can use the following options to
7572 fine-tune the ports you are interested in:
7576 =item B<ListeningPorts> I<true>|I<false>
7578 If this option is set to I<true>, statistics for all local ports for which a
7579 listening socket exists are collected. The default depends on B<LocalPort> and
7580 B<RemotePort> (see below): If no port at all is specifically selected, the
7581 default is to collect listening ports. If specific ports (no matter if local or
7582 remote ports) are selected, this option defaults to I<false>, i.E<nbsp>e. only
7583 the selected ports will be collected unless this option is set to I<true>
7586 =item B<LocalPort> I<Port>
7588 Count the connections to a specific local port. This can be used to see how
7589 many connections are handled by a specific daemon, e.E<nbsp>g. the mailserver.
7590 You have to specify the port in numeric form, so for the mailserver example
7591 you'd need to set B<25>.
7593 =item B<RemotePort> I<Port>
7595 Count the connections to a specific remote port. This is useful to see how
7596 much a remote service is used. This is most useful if you want to know how many
7597 connections a local service has opened to remote services, e.E<nbsp>g. how many
7598 connections a mail server or news server has to other mail or news servers, or
7599 how many connections a web proxy holds to web servers. You have to give the
7600 port in numeric form.
7602 =item B<AllPortsSummary> I<true>|I<false>
7604 If this option is set to I<true> a summary of statistics from all connections
7605 are collected. This option defaults to I<false>.
7609 =head2 Plugin C<thermal>
7613 =item B<ForceUseProcfs> I<true>|I<false>
7615 By default, the I<Thermal plugin> tries to read the statistics from the Linux
7616 C<sysfs> interface. If that is not available, the plugin falls back to the
7617 C<procfs> interface. By setting this option to I<true>, you can force the
7618 plugin to use the latter. This option defaults to I<false>.
7620 =item B<Device> I<Device>
7622 Selects the name of the thermal device that you want to collect or ignore,
7623 depending on the value of the B<IgnoreSelected> option. This option may be
7624 used multiple times to specify a list of devices.
7626 =item B<IgnoreSelected> I<true>|I<false>
7628 Invert the selection: If set to true, all devices B<except> the ones that
7629 match the device names specified by the B<Device> option are collected. By
7630 default only selected devices are collected if a selection is made. If no
7631 selection is configured at all, B<all> devices are selected.
7635 =head2 Plugin C<threshold>
7637 The I<Threshold plugin> checks values collected or received by I<collectd>
7638 against a configurable I<threshold> and issues I<notifications> if values are
7641 Documentation for this plugin is available in the L<collectd-threshold(5)>
7644 =head2 Plugin C<tokyotyrant>
7646 The I<TokyoTyrant plugin> connects to a TokyoTyrant server and collects a
7647 couple metrics: number of records, and database size on disk.
7651 =item B<Host> I<Hostname/IP>
7653 The hostname or IP which identifies the server.
7654 Default: B<127.0.0.1>
7656 =item B<Port> I<Service/Port>
7658 The query port of the server. This needs to be a string, even if the port is
7659 given in its numeric form.
7664 =head2 Plugin C<turbostat>
7666 The I<Turbostat plugin> reads CPU frequency and C-state residency on modern
7667 Intel processors by using I<Model Specific Registers>.
7671 =item B<CoreCstates> I<Bitmask(Integer)>
7673 Bit mask of the list of core C-states supported by the processor.
7674 This option should only be used if the automated detection fails.
7675 Default value extracted from the CPU model and family.
7677 Currently supported C-states (by this plugin): 3, 6, 7
7681 All states (3, 6 and 7):
7682 (1<<3) + (1<<6) + (1<<7) = 392
7684 =item B<PackageCstates> I<Bitmask(Integer)>
7686 Bit mask of the list of packages C-states supported by the processor. This
7687 option should only be used if the automated detection fails. Default value
7688 extracted from the CPU model and family.
7690 Currently supported C-states (by this plugin): 2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
7694 States 2, 3, 6 and 7:
7695 (1<<2) + (1<<3) + (1<<6) + (1<<7) = 396
7697 =item B<SystemManagementInterrupt> I<true>|I<false>
7699 Boolean enabling the collection of the I/O System-Management Interrupt counter.
7700 This option should only be used if the automated detection fails or if you want
7701 to disable this feature.
7703 =item B<DigitalTemperatureSensor> I<true>|I<false>
7705 Boolean enabling the collection of the temperature of each core. This option
7706 should only be used if the automated detection fails or if you want to disable
7709 =item B<TCCActivationTemp> I<Temperature>
7711 I<Thermal Control Circuit Activation Temperature> of the installed CPU. This
7712 temperature is used when collecting the temperature of cores or packages. This
7713 option should only be used if the automated detection fails. Default value
7714 extracted from B<MSR_IA32_TEMPERATURE_TARGET>.
7716 =item B<RunningAveragePowerLimit> I<Bitmask(Integer)>
7718 Bit mask of the list of elements to be thermally monitored. This option should
7719 only be used if the automated detection fails or if you want to disable some
7720 collections. The different bits of this bit mask accepted by this plugin are:
7724 =item 0 ('1'): Package
7728 =item 2 ('4'): Cores
7730 =item 3 ('8'): Embedded graphic device
7734 =item B<LogicalCoreNames> I<true>|I<false>
7736 Boolean enabling the use of logical core numbering for per core statistics.
7737 When enabled, C<cpuE<lt>nE<gt>> is used as plugin instance, where I<n> is a
7738 sequential number assigned by the kernel. Otherwise, C<coreE<lt>nE<gt>> is used
7739 where I<n> is the n-th core of the socket, causing name conflicts when there is
7740 more than one socket.
7744 =head2 Plugin C<unixsock>
7748 =item B<SocketFile> I<Path>
7750 Sets the socket-file which is to be created.
7752 =item B<SocketGroup> I<Group>
7754 If running as root change the group of the UNIX-socket after it has been
7755 created. Defaults to B<collectd>.
7757 =item B<SocketPerms> I<Permissions>
7759 Change the file permissions of the UNIX-socket after it has been created. The
7760 permissions must be given as a numeric, octal value as you would pass to
7761 L<chmod(1)>. Defaults to B<0770>.
7763 =item B<DeleteSocket> B<false>|B<true>
7765 If set to B<true>, delete the socket file before calling L<bind(2)>, if a file
7766 with the given name already exists. If I<collectd> crashes a socket file may be
7767 left over, preventing the daemon from opening a new socket when restarted.
7768 Since this is potentially dangerous, this defaults to B<false>.
7772 =head2 Plugin C<uuid>
7774 This plugin, if loaded, causes the Hostname to be taken from the machine's
7775 UUID. The UUID is a universally unique designation for the machine, usually
7776 taken from the machine's BIOS. This is most useful if the machine is running in
7777 a virtual environment such as Xen, in which case the UUID is preserved across
7778 shutdowns and migration.
7780 The following methods are used to find the machine's UUID, in order:
7786 Check I</etc/uuid> (or I<UUIDFile>).
7790 Check for UUID from HAL (L<http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/hal>) if
7795 Check for UUID from C<dmidecode> / SMBIOS.
7799 Check for UUID from Xen hypervisor.
7803 If no UUID can be found then the hostname is not modified.
7807 =item B<UUIDFile> I<Path>
7809 Take the UUID from the given file (default I</etc/uuid>).
7813 =head2 Plugin C<varnish>
7815 The I<varnish plugin> collects information about Varnish, an HTTP accelerator.
7816 It collects a subset of the values displayed by L<varnishstat(1)>, and
7817 organizes them in categories which can be enabled or disabled. Currently only
7818 metrics shown in L<varnishstat(1)>'s I<MAIN> section are collected. The exact
7819 meaning of each metric can be found in L<varnish-counters(7)>.
7824 <Instance "example">
7828 CollectConnections true
7829 CollectDirectorDNS false
7833 CollectObjects false
7835 CollectSession false
7845 CollectWorkers false
7849 The configuration consists of one or more E<lt>B<Instance>E<nbsp>I<Name>E<gt>
7850 blocks. I<Name> is the parameter passed to "varnishd -n". If left empty, it
7851 will collectd statistics from the default "varnishd" instance (this should work
7852 fine in most cases).
7854 Inside each E<lt>B<Instance>E<gt> blocks, the following options are recognized:
7858 =item B<CollectBackend> B<true>|B<false>
7860 Back-end connection statistics, such as successful, reused,
7861 and closed connections. True by default.
7863 =item B<CollectBan> B<true>|B<false>
7865 Statistics about ban operations, such as number of bans added, retired, and
7866 number of objects tested against ban operations. Only available with Varnish
7867 3.x and above. False by default.
7869 =item B<CollectCache> B<true>|B<false>
7871 Cache hits and misses. True by default.
7873 =item B<CollectConnections> B<true>|B<false>
7875 Number of client connections received, accepted and dropped. True by default.
7877 =item B<CollectDirectorDNS> B<true>|B<false>
7879 DNS director lookup cache statistics. Only available with Varnish 3.x. False by
7882 =item B<CollectESI> B<true>|B<false>
7884 Edge Side Includes (ESI) parse statistics. False by default.
7886 =item B<CollectFetch> B<true>|B<false>
7888 Statistics about fetches (HTTP requests sent to the backend). False by default.
7890 =item B<CollectHCB> B<true>|B<false>
7892 Inserts and look-ups in the crit bit tree based hash. Look-ups are
7893 divided into locked and unlocked look-ups. False by default.
7895 =item B<CollectObjects> B<true>|B<false>
7897 Statistics on cached objects: number of objects expired, nuked (prematurely
7898 expired), saved, moved, etc. False by default.
7900 =item B<CollectPurge> B<true>|B<false>
7902 Statistics about purge operations, such as number of purges added, retired, and
7903 number of objects tested against purge operations. Only available with Varnish
7904 2.x. False by default.
7906 =item B<CollectSession> B<true>|B<false>
7908 Client session statistics. Number of past and current sessions, session herd and
7909 linger counters, etc. False by default. Note that if using Varnish 4.x, some
7910 metrics found in the Connections and Threads sections with previous versions of
7911 Varnish have been moved here.
7913 =item B<CollectSHM> B<true>|B<false>
7915 Statistics about the shared memory log, a memory region to store
7916 log messages which is flushed to disk when full. True by default.
7918 =item B<CollectSMA> B<true>|B<false>
7920 malloc or umem (umem_alloc(3MALLOC) based) storage statistics. The umem storage
7921 component is Solaris specific. Only available with Varnish 2.x. False by
7924 =item B<CollectSMS> B<true>|B<false>
7926 synth (synthetic content) storage statistics. This storage
7927 component is used internally only. False by default.
7929 =item B<CollectSM> B<true>|B<false>
7931 file (memory mapped file) storage statistics. Only available with Varnish 2.x.
7934 =item B<CollectStruct> B<true>|B<false>
7936 Current varnish internal state statistics. Number of current sessions, objects
7937 in cache store, open connections to backends (with Varnish 2.x), etc. False by
7940 =item B<CollectTotals> B<true>|B<false>
7942 Collects overview counters, such as the number of sessions created,
7943 the number of requests and bytes transferred. False by default.
7945 =item B<CollectUptime> B<true>|B<false>
7947 Varnish uptime. Only available with Varnish 3.x and above. False by default.
7949 =item B<CollectVCL> B<true>|B<false>
7951 Number of total (available + discarded) VCL (config files). False by default.
7953 =item B<CollectVSM> B<true>|B<false>
7955 Collect statistics about Varnish's shared memory usage (used by the logging and
7956 statistics subsystems). Only available with Varnish 4.x. False by default.
7958 =item B<CollectWorkers> B<true>|B<false>
7960 Collect statistics about worker threads. False by default.
7964 =head2 Plugin C<virt>
7966 This plugin allows CPU, disk and network load to be collected for virtualized
7967 guests on the machine. This means that these metrics can be collected for guest
7968 systems without installing any software on them - I<collectd> only runs on the
7969 host system. The statistics are collected through libvirt
7970 (L<http://libvirt.org/>).
7972 Only I<Connection> is required.
7976 =item B<Connection> I<uri>
7978 Connect to the hypervisor given by I<uri>. For example if using Xen use:
7980 Connection "xen:///"
7982 Details which URIs allowed are given at L<http://libvirt.org/uri.html>.
7984 =item B<RefreshInterval> I<seconds>
7986 Refresh the list of domains and devices every I<seconds>. The default is 60
7987 seconds. Setting this to be the same or smaller than the I<Interval> will cause
7988 the list of domains and devices to be refreshed on every iteration.
7990 Refreshing the devices in particular is quite a costly operation, so if your
7991 virtualization setup is static you might consider increasing this. If this
7992 option is set to 0, refreshing is disabled completely.
7994 =item B<Domain> I<name>
7996 =item B<BlockDevice> I<name:dev>
7998 =item B<InterfaceDevice> I<name:dev>
8000 =item B<IgnoreSelected> B<true>|B<false>
8002 Select which domains and devices are collected.
8004 If I<IgnoreSelected> is not given or B<false> then only the listed domains and
8005 disk/network devices are collected.
8007 If I<IgnoreSelected> is B<true> then the test is reversed and the listed
8008 domains and disk/network devices are ignored, while the rest are collected.
8010 The domain name and device names may use a regular expression, if the name is
8011 surrounded by I</.../> and collectd was compiled with support for regexps.
8013 The default is to collect statistics for all domains and all their devices.
8017 BlockDevice "/:hdb/"
8018 IgnoreSelected "true"
8020 Ignore all I<hdb> devices on any domain, but other block devices (eg. I<hda>)
8023 =item B<BlockDeviceFormat> B<target>|B<source>
8025 If I<BlockDeviceFormat> is set to B<target>, the default, then the device name
8026 seen by the guest will be used for reporting metrics.
8027 This corresponds to the C<E<lt>targetE<gt>> node in the XML definition of the
8030 If I<BlockDeviceFormat> is set to B<source>, then metrics will be reported
8031 using the path of the source, e.g. an image file.
8032 This corresponds to the C<E<lt>sourceE<gt>> node in the XML definition of the
8037 If the domain XML have the following device defined:
8039 <disk type='block' device='disk'>
8040 <driver name='qemu' type='raw' cache='none' io='native' discard='unmap'/>
8041 <source dev='/var/lib/libvirt/images/image1.qcow2'/>
8042 <target dev='sda' bus='scsi'/>
8044 <address type='drive' controller='0' bus='0' target='0' unit='0'/>
8047 Setting C<BlockDeviceFormat target> will cause the I<type instance> to be set
8049 Setting C<BlockDeviceFormat source> will cause the I<type instance> to be set
8050 to C<var_lib_libvirt_images_image1.qcow2>.
8052 =item B<BlockDeviceFormatBasename> B<false>|B<true>
8054 The B<BlockDeviceFormatBasename> controls whether the full path or the
8055 L<basename(1)> of the source is being used as the I<type instance> when
8056 B<BlockDeviceFormat> is set to B<source>. Defaults to B<false>.
8060 Assume the device path (source tag) is C</var/lib/libvirt/images/image1.qcow2>.
8061 Setting C<BlockDeviceFormatBasename false> will cause the I<type instance> to
8062 be set to C<var_lib_libvirt_images_image1.qcow2>.
8063 Setting C<BlockDeviceFormatBasename true> will cause the I<type instance> to be
8064 set to C<image1.qcow2>.
8066 =item B<HostnameFormat> B<name|uuid|hostname|...>
8068 When the virt plugin logs data, it sets the hostname of the collected data
8069 according to this setting. The default is to use the guest name as provided by
8070 the hypervisor, which is equal to setting B<name>.
8072 B<uuid> means use the guest's UUID. This is useful if you want to track the
8073 same guest across migrations.
8075 B<hostname> means to use the global B<Hostname> setting, which is probably not
8076 useful on its own because all guests will appear to have the same name.
8078 You can also specify combinations of these fields. For example B<name uuid>
8079 means to concatenate the guest name and UUID (with a literal colon character
8080 between, thus I<"foo:1234-1234-1234-1234">).
8082 At the moment of writing (collectd-5.5), hostname string is limited to 62
8083 characters. In case when combination of fields exceeds 62 characters,
8084 hostname will be truncated without a warning.
8086 =item B<InterfaceFormat> B<name>|B<address>
8088 When the virt plugin logs interface data, it sets the name of the collected
8089 data according to this setting. The default is to use the path as provided by
8090 the hypervisor (the "dev" property of the target node), which is equal to
8093 B<address> means use the interface's mac address. This is useful since the
8094 interface path might change between reboots of a guest or across migrations.
8096 =item B<PluginInstanceFormat> B<name|uuid|none>
8098 When the virt plugin logs data, it sets the plugin_instance of the collected
8099 data according to this setting. The default is to not set the plugin_instance.
8101 B<name> means use the guest's name as provided by the hypervisor.
8102 B<uuid> means use the guest's UUID.
8104 You can also specify combinations of the B<name> and B<uuid> fields.
8105 For example B<name uuid> means to concatenate the guest name and UUID
8106 (with a literal colon character between, thus I<"foo:1234-1234-1234-1234">).
8108 =item B<Instances> B<integer>
8110 How many read instances you want to use for this plugin. The default is one,
8111 and the sensible setting is a multiple of the B<ReadThreads> value.
8112 If you are not sure, just use the default setting.
8114 =item B<ExtraStats> B<string>
8116 Report additional extra statistics. The default is no extra statistics, preserving
8117 the previous behaviour of the plugin. If unsure, leave the default. If enabled,
8118 allows the plugin to reported more detailed statistics about the behaviour of
8119 Virtual Machines. The argument is a space-separated list of selectors.
8120 Currently supported selectors are:
8121 B<disk> report extra statistics like number of flush operations and total
8122 service time for read, write and flush operations.
8123 B<pcpu> report the physical user/system cpu time consumed by the hypervisor, per-vm.
8127 =head2 Plugin C<vmem>
8129 The C<vmem> plugin collects information about the usage of virtual memory.
8130 Since the statistics provided by the Linux kernel are very detailed, they are
8131 collected very detailed. However, to get all the details, you have to switch
8132 them on manually. Most people just want an overview over, such as the number of
8133 pages read from swap space.
8137 =item B<Verbose> B<true>|B<false>
8139 Enables verbose collection of information. This will start collecting page
8140 "actions", e.E<nbsp>g. page allocations, (de)activations, steals and so on.
8141 Part of these statistics are collected on a "per zone" basis.
8145 =head2 Plugin C<vserver>
8147 This plugin doesn't have any options. B<VServer> support is only available for
8148 Linux. It cannot yet be found in a vanilla kernel, though. To make use of this
8149 plugin you need a kernel that has B<VServer> support built in, i.E<nbsp>e. you
8150 need to apply the patches and compile your own kernel, which will then provide
8151 the F</proc/virtual> filesystem that is required by this plugin.
8153 The B<VServer> homepage can be found at L<http://linux-vserver.org/>.
8155 B<Note>: The traffic collected by this plugin accounts for the amount of
8156 traffic passing a socket which might be a lot less than the actual on-wire
8157 traffic (e.E<nbsp>g. due to headers and retransmission). If you want to
8158 collect on-wire traffic you could, for example, use the logging facilities of
8159 iptables to feed data for the guest IPs into the iptables plugin.
8161 =head2 Plugin C<write_graphite>
8163 The C<write_graphite> plugin writes data to I<Graphite>, an open-source metrics
8164 storage and graphing project. The plugin connects to I<Carbon>, the data layer
8165 of I<Graphite>, via I<TCP> or I<UDP> and sends data via the "line based"
8166 protocol (per default using portE<nbsp>2003). The data will be sent in blocks
8167 of at most 1428 bytes to minimize the number of network packets.
8171 <Plugin write_graphite>
8181 The configuration consists of one or more E<lt>B<Node>E<nbsp>I<Name>E<gt>
8182 blocks. Inside the B<Node> blocks, the following options are recognized:
8186 =item B<Host> I<Address>
8188 Hostname or address to connect to. Defaults to C<localhost>.
8190 =item B<Port> I<Service>
8192 Service name or port number to connect to. Defaults to C<2003>.
8194 =item B<Protocol> I<String>
8196 Protocol to use when connecting to I<Graphite>. Defaults to C<tcp>.
8198 =item B<ReconnectInterval> I<Seconds>
8200 When set to non-zero, forces the connection to the Graphite backend to be
8201 closed and re-opend periodically. This behavior is desirable in environments
8202 where the connection to the Graphite backend is done through load balancers,
8203 for example. When set to zero, the default, the connetion is kept open for as
8206 =item B<LogSendErrors> B<false>|B<true>
8208 If set to B<true> (the default), logs errors when sending data to I<Graphite>.
8209 If set to B<false>, it will not log the errors. This is especially useful when
8210 using Protocol UDP since many times we want to use the "fire-and-forget"
8211 approach and logging errors fills syslog with unneeded messages.
8213 =item B<Prefix> I<String>
8215 When set, I<String> is added in front of the host name. Dots and whitespace are
8216 I<not> escaped in this string (see B<EscapeCharacter> below).
8218 =item B<Postfix> I<String>
8220 When set, I<String> is appended to the host name. Dots and whitespace are
8221 I<not> escaped in this string (see B<EscapeCharacter> below).
8223 =item B<EscapeCharacter> I<Char>
8225 I<Carbon> uses the dot (C<.>) as escape character and doesn't allow whitespace
8226 in the identifier. The B<EscapeCharacter> option determines which character
8227 dots, whitespace and control characters are replaced with. Defaults to
8230 =item B<StoreRates> B<false>|B<true>
8232 If set to B<true> (the default), convert counter values to rates. If set to
8233 B<false> counter values are stored as is, i.E<nbsp>e. as an increasing integer
8236 =item B<SeparateInstances> B<false>|B<true>
8238 If set to B<true>, the plugin instance and type instance will be in their own
8239 path component, for example C<host.cpu.0.cpu.idle>. If set to B<false> (the
8240 default), the plugin and plugin instance (and likewise the type and type
8241 instance) are put into one component, for example C<host.cpu-0.cpu-idle>.
8243 =item B<AlwaysAppendDS> B<false>|B<true>
8245 If set to B<true>, append the name of the I<Data Source> (DS) to the "metric"
8246 identifier. If set to B<false> (the default), this is only done when there is
8249 =item B<PreserveSeparator> B<false>|B<true>
8251 If set to B<false> (the default) the C<.> (dot) character is replaced with
8252 I<EscapeCharacter>. Otherwise, if set to B<true>, the C<.> (dot) character
8253 is preserved, i.e. passed through.
8255 =item B<DropDuplicateFields> B<false>|B<true>
8257 If set to B<true>, detect and remove duplicate components in Graphite metric
8258 names. For example, the metric name C<host.load.load.shortterm> will
8259 be shortened to C<host.load.shortterm>.
8263 =head2 Plugin C<write_log>
8265 The C<write_log> plugin writes metrics as INFO log messages.
8267 This plugin supports two output formats: I<Graphite> and I<JSON>.
8277 =item B<Format> I<Format>
8279 The output format to use. Can be one of C<Graphite> or C<JSON>.
8283 =head2 Plugin C<write_tsdb>
8285 The C<write_tsdb> plugin writes data to I<OpenTSDB>, a scalable open-source
8286 time series database. The plugin connects to a I<TSD>, a masterless, no shared
8287 state daemon that ingests metrics and stores them in HBase. The plugin uses
8288 I<TCP> over the "line based" protocol with a default port 4242. The data will
8289 be sent in blocks of at most 1428 bytes to minimize the number of network
8298 Host "tsd-1.my.domain"
8300 HostTags "status=production"
8304 The configuration consists of one or more E<lt>B<Node>E<nbsp>I<Name>E<gt>
8305 blocks and global directives.
8307 Global directives are:
8311 =item B<ResolveInterval> I<seconds>
8313 =item B<ResolveJitter> I<seconds>
8315 When I<collectd> connects to a TSDB node, it will request the hostname from
8316 DNS. This can become a problem if the TSDB node is unavailable or badly
8317 configured because collectd will request DNS in order to reconnect for every
8318 metric, which can flood your DNS. So you can cache the last value for
8319 I<ResolveInterval> seconds.
8320 Defaults to the I<Interval> of the I<write_tsdb plugin>, e.g. 10E<nbsp>seconds.
8322 You can also define a jitter, a random interval to wait in addition to
8323 I<ResolveInterval>. This prevents all your collectd servers to resolve the
8324 hostname at the same time when the connection fails.
8325 Defaults to the I<Interval> of the I<write_tsdb plugin>, e.g. 10E<nbsp>seconds.
8327 B<Note:> If the DNS resolution has already been successful when the socket
8328 closes, the plugin will try to reconnect immediately with the cached
8329 information. DNS is queried only when the socket is closed for a longer than
8330 I<ResolveInterval> + I<ResolveJitter> seconds.
8334 Inside the B<Node> blocks, the following options are recognized:
8338 =item B<Host> I<Address>
8340 Hostname or address to connect to. Defaults to C<localhost>.
8342 =item B<Port> I<Service>
8344 Service name or port number to connect to. Defaults to C<4242>.
8347 =item B<HostTags> I<String>
8349 When set, I<HostTags> is added to the end of the metric. It is intended to be
8350 used for name=value pairs that the TSD will tag the metric with. Dots and
8351 whitespace are I<not> escaped in this string.
8353 =item B<StoreRates> B<false>|B<true>
8355 If set to B<true>, convert counter values to rates. If set to B<false>
8356 (the default) counter values are stored as is, as an increasing
8359 =item B<AlwaysAppendDS> B<false>|B<true>
8361 If set the B<true>, append the name of the I<Data Source> (DS) to the "metric"
8362 identifier. If set to B<false> (the default), this is only done when there is
8367 =head2 Plugin C<write_mongodb>
8369 The I<write_mongodb plugin> will send values to I<MongoDB>, a schema-less
8374 <Plugin "write_mongodb">
8383 The plugin can send values to multiple instances of I<MongoDB> by specifying
8384 one B<Node> block for each instance. Within the B<Node> blocks, the following
8385 options are available:
8389 =item B<Host> I<Address>
8391 Hostname or address to connect to. Defaults to C<localhost>.
8393 =item B<Port> I<Service>
8395 Service name or port number to connect to. Defaults to C<27017>.
8397 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
8399 Set the timeout for each operation on I<MongoDB> to I<Timeout> milliseconds.
8400 Setting this option to zero means no timeout, which is the default.
8402 =item B<StoreRates> B<false>|B<true>
8404 If set to B<true> (the default), convert counter values to rates. If set to
8405 B<false> counter values are stored as is, i.e. as an increasing integer
8408 =item B<Database> I<Database>
8410 =item B<User> I<User>
8412 =item B<Password> I<Password>
8414 Sets the information used when authenticating to a I<MongoDB> database. The
8415 fields are optional (in which case no authentication is attempted), but if you
8416 want to use authentication all three fields must be set.
8420 =head2 Plugin C<write_prometheus>
8422 The I<write_prometheus plugin> implements a tiny webserver that can be scraped
8423 using I<Prometheus>.
8429 =item B<Port> I<Port>
8431 Port the embedded webserver should listen on. Defaults to B<9103>.
8433 =item B<StalenessDelta> I<Seconds>
8435 Time in seconds after which I<Prometheus> considers a metric "stale" if it
8436 hasn't seen any update for it. This value must match the setting in Prometheus.
8437 It defaults to B<300> seconds (5 minutes), same as Prometheus.
8441 I<Prometheus> has a global setting, C<StalenessDelta>, which controls after
8442 which time a metric without updates is considered "stale". This setting
8443 effectively puts an upper limit on the interval in which metrics are reported.
8445 When the I<write_prometheus plugin> encounters a metric with an interval
8446 exceeding this limit, it will inform you, the user, and provide the metric to
8447 I<Prometheus> B<without> a timestamp. That causes I<Prometheus> to consider the
8448 metric "fresh" each time it is scraped, with the time of the scrape being
8449 considered the time of the update. The result is that there appear more
8450 datapoints in I<Prometheus> than were actually created, but at least the metric
8451 doesn't disappear periodically.
8455 =head2 Plugin C<write_http>
8457 This output plugin submits values to an HTTP server using POST requests and
8458 encoding metrics with JSON or using the C<PUTVAL> command described in
8459 L<collectd-unixsock(5)>.
8463 <Plugin "write_http">
8465 URL "http://example.com/post-collectd"
8472 The plugin can send values to multiple HTTP servers by specifying one
8473 E<lt>B<Node>E<nbsp>I<Name>E<gt> block for each server. Within each B<Node>
8474 block, the following options are available:
8480 URL to which the values are submitted to. Mandatory.
8482 =item B<User> I<Username>
8484 Optional user name needed for authentication.
8486 =item B<Password> I<Password>
8488 Optional password needed for authentication.
8490 =item B<VerifyPeer> B<true>|B<false>
8492 Enable or disable peer SSL certificate verification. See
8493 L<http://curl.haxx.se/docs/sslcerts.html> for details. Enabled by default.
8495 =item B<VerifyHost> B<true|false>
8497 Enable or disable peer host name verification. If enabled, the plugin checks if
8498 the C<Common Name> or a C<Subject Alternate Name> field of the SSL certificate
8499 matches the host name provided by the B<URL> option. If this identity check
8500 fails, the connection is aborted. Obviously, only works when connecting to a
8501 SSL enabled server. Enabled by default.
8503 =item B<CACert> I<File>
8505 File that holds one or more SSL certificates. If you want to use HTTPS you will
8506 possibly need this option. What CA certificates come bundled with C<libcurl>
8507 and are checked by default depends on the distribution you use.
8509 =item B<CAPath> I<Directory>
8511 Directory holding one or more CA certificate files. You can use this if for
8512 some reason all the needed CA certificates aren't in the same file and can't be
8513 pointed to using the B<CACert> option. Requires C<libcurl> to be built against
8516 =item B<ClientKey> I<File>
8518 File that holds the private key in PEM format to be used for certificate-based
8521 =item B<ClientCert> I<File>
8523 File that holds the SSL certificate to be used for certificate-based
8526 =item B<ClientKeyPass> I<Password>
8528 Password required to load the private key in B<ClientKey>.
8530 =item B<Header> I<Header>
8532 A HTTP header to add to the request. Multiple headers are added if this option is specified more than once. Example:
8534 Header "X-Custom-Header: custom_value"
8536 =item B<SSLVersion> B<SSLv2>|B<SSLv3>|B<TLSv1>|B<TLSv1_0>|B<TLSv1_1>|B<TLSv1_2>
8538 Define which SSL protocol version must be used. By default C<libcurl> will
8539 attempt to figure out the remote SSL protocol version. See
8540 L<curl_easy_setopt(3)> for more details.
8542 =item B<Format> B<Command>|B<JSON>|B<KAIROSDB>
8544 Format of the output to generate. If set to B<Command>, will create output that
8545 is understood by the I<Exec> and I<UnixSock> plugins. When set to B<JSON>, will
8546 create output in the I<JavaScript Object Notation> (JSON). When set to KAIROSDB
8547 , will create output in the KairosDB format.
8549 Defaults to B<Command>.
8551 =item B<Metrics> B<true>|B<false>
8553 Controls whether I<metrics> are POSTed to this location. Defaults to B<true>.
8555 =item B<Notifications> B<false>|B<true>
8557 Controls whether I<notifications> are POSTed to this location. Defaults to B<false>.
8559 =item B<StoreRates> B<true|false>
8561 If set to B<true>, convert counter values to rates. If set to B<false> (the
8562 default) counter values are stored as is, i.e. as an increasing integer number.
8564 =item B<BufferSize> I<Bytes>
8566 Sets the send buffer size to I<Bytes>. By increasing this buffer, less HTTP
8567 requests will be generated, but more metrics will be batched / metrics are
8568 cached for longer before being sent, introducing additional delay until they
8569 are available on the server side. I<Bytes> must be at least 1024 and cannot
8570 exceed the size of an C<int>, i.e. 2E<nbsp>GByte.
8571 Defaults to C<4096>.
8573 =item B<LowSpeedLimit> I<Bytes per Second>
8575 Sets the minimal transfer rate in I<Bytes per Second> below which the
8576 connection with the HTTP server will be considered too slow and aborted. All
8577 the data submitted over this connection will probably be lost. Defaults to 0,
8578 which means no minimum transfer rate is enforced.
8580 =item B<Timeout> I<Timeout>
8582 Sets the maximum time in milliseconds given for HTTP POST operations to
8583 complete. When this limit is reached, the POST operation will be aborted, and
8584 all the data in the current send buffer will probably be lost. Defaults to 0,
8585 which means the connection never times out.
8587 =item B<LogHttpError> B<false>|B<true>
8589 Enables printing of HTTP error code to log. Turned off by default.
8591 The C<write_http> plugin regularly submits the collected values to the HTTP
8592 server. How frequently this happens depends on how much data you are collecting
8593 and the size of B<BufferSize>. The optimal value to set B<Timeout> to is
8594 slightly below this interval, which you can estimate by monitoring the network
8595 traffic between collectd and the HTTP server.
8599 =head2 Plugin C<write_kafka>
8601 The I<write_kafka plugin> will send values to a I<Kafka> topic, a distributed
8605 <Plugin "write_kafka">
8606 Property "metadata.broker.list" "broker1:9092,broker2:9092"
8612 The following options are understood by the I<write_kafka plugin>:
8616 =item E<lt>B<Topic> I<Name>E<gt>
8618 The plugin's configuration consists of one or more B<Topic> blocks. Each block
8619 is given a unique I<Name> and specifies one kafka producer.
8620 Inside the B<Topic> block, the following per-topic options are
8625 =item B<Property> I<String> I<String>
8627 Configure the named property for the current topic. Properties are
8628 forwarded to the kafka producer library B<librdkafka>.
8630 =item B<Key> I<String>
8632 Use the specified string as a partitioning key for the topic. Kafka breaks
8633 topic into partitions and guarantees that for a given topology, the same
8634 consumer will be used for a specific key. The special (case insensitive)
8635 string B<Random> can be used to specify that an arbitrary partition should
8638 =item B<Format> B<Command>|B<JSON>|B<Graphite>
8640 Selects the format in which messages are sent to the broker. If set to
8641 B<Command> (the default), values are sent as C<PUTVAL> commands which are
8642 identical to the syntax used by the I<Exec> and I<UnixSock plugins>.
8644 If set to B<JSON>, the values are encoded in the I<JavaScript Object Notation>,
8645 an easy and straight forward exchange format.
8647 If set to B<Graphite>, values are encoded in the I<Graphite> format, which is
8648 C<E<lt>metricE<gt> E<lt>valueE<gt> E<lt>timestampE<gt>\n>.
8650 =item B<StoreRates> B<true>|B<false>
8652 Determines whether or not C<COUNTER>, C<DERIVE> and C<ABSOLUTE> data sources
8653 are converted to a I<rate> (i.e. a C<GAUGE> value). If set to B<false> (the
8654 default), no conversion is performed. Otherwise the conversion is performed
8655 using the internal value cache.
8657 Please note that currently this option is only used if the B<Format> option has
8658 been set to B<JSON>.
8660 =item B<GraphitePrefix> (B<Format>=I<Graphite> only)
8662 A prefix can be added in the metric name when outputting in the I<Graphite>
8663 format. It's added before the I<Host> name.
8665 C<E<lt>prefixE<gt>E<lt>hostE<gt>E<lt>postfixE<gt>E<lt>pluginE<gt>E<lt>typeE<gt>E<lt>nameE<gt>>
8667 =item B<GraphitePostfix> (B<Format>=I<Graphite> only)
8669 A postfix can be added in the metric name when outputting in the I<Graphite>
8670 format. It's added after the I<Host> name.
8672 C<E<lt>prefixE<gt>E<lt>hostE<gt>E<lt>postfixE<gt>E<lt>pluginE<gt>E<lt>typeE<gt>E<lt>nameE<gt>>
8674 =item B<GraphiteEscapeChar> (B<Format>=I<Graphite> only)
8676 Specify a character to replace dots (.) in the host part of the metric name.
8677 In I<Graphite> metric name, dots are used as separators between different
8678 metric parts (host, plugin, type).
8679 Default is C<_> (I<Underscore>).
8681 =item B<GraphiteSeparateInstances> B<false>|B<true>
8683 If set to B<true>, the plugin instance and type instance will be in their own
8684 path component, for example C<host.cpu.0.cpu.idle>. If set to B<false> (the
8685 default), the plugin and plugin instance (and likewise the type and type
8686 instance) are put into one component, for example C<host.cpu-0.cpu-idle>.
8688 =item B<GraphiteAlwaysAppendDS> B<true>|B<false>
8690 If set to B<true>, append the name of the I<Data Source> (DS) to the "metric"
8691 identifier. If set to B<false> (the default), this is only done when there is
8694 =item B<GraphitePreserveSeparator> B<false>|B<true>
8696 If set to B<false> (the default) the C<.> (dot) character is replaced with
8697 I<GraphiteEscapeChar>. Otherwise, if set to B<true>, the C<.> (dot) character
8698 is preserved, i.e. passed through.
8700 =item B<StoreRates> B<true>|B<false>
8702 If set to B<true> (the default), convert counter values to rates. If set to
8703 B<false> counter values are stored as is, i.e. as an increasing integer number.
8705 This will be reflected in the C<ds_type> tag: If B<StoreRates> is enabled,
8706 converted values will have "rate" appended to the data source type, e.g.
8707 C<ds_type:derive:rate>.
8711 =item B<Property> I<String> I<String>
8713 Configure the kafka producer through properties, you almost always will
8714 want to set B<metadata.broker.list> to your Kafka broker list.
8718 =head2 Plugin C<write_redis>
8720 The I<write_redis plugin> submits values to I<Redis>, a data structure server.
8724 <Plugin "write_redis">
8736 Values are submitted to I<Sorted Sets>, using the metric name as the key, and
8737 the timestamp as the score. Retrieving a date range can then be done using the
8738 C<ZRANGEBYSCORE> I<Redis> command. Additionally, all the identifiers of these
8739 I<Sorted Sets> are kept in a I<Set> called C<collectd/values> (or
8740 C<${prefix}/values> if the B<Prefix> option was specified) and can be retrieved
8741 using the C<SMEMBERS> I<Redis> command. You can specify the database to use
8742 with the B<Database> parameter (default is C<0>). See
8743 L<http://redis.io/commands#sorted_set> and L<http://redis.io/commands#set> for
8746 The information shown in the synopsis above is the I<default configuration>
8747 which is used by the plugin if no configuration is present.
8749 The plugin can send values to multiple instances of I<Redis> by specifying
8750 one B<Node> block for each instance. Within the B<Node> blocks, the following
8751 options are available:
8755 =item B<Node> I<Nodename>
8757 The B<Node> block identifies a new I<Redis> node, that is a new I<Redis>
8758 instance running on a specified host and port. The node name is a
8759 canonical identifier which is used as I<plugin instance>. It is limited to
8760 51E<nbsp>characters in length.
8762 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
8764 The B<Host> option is the hostname or IP-address where the I<Redis> instance is
8767 =item B<Port> I<Port>
8769 The B<Port> option is the TCP port on which the Redis instance accepts
8770 connections. Either a service name of a port number may be given. Please note
8771 that numerical port numbers must be given as a string, too.
8773 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
8775 The B<Timeout> option sets the socket connection timeout, in milliseconds.
8777 =item B<Prefix> I<Prefix>
8779 Prefix used when constructing the name of the I<Sorted Sets> and the I<Set>
8780 containing all metrics. Defaults to C<collectd/>, so metrics will have names
8781 like C<collectd/cpu-0/cpu-user>. When setting this to something different, it
8782 is recommended but not required to include a trailing slash in I<Prefix>.
8784 =item B<Database> I<Index>
8786 This index selects the redis database to use for writing operations. Defaults
8789 =item B<MaxSetSize> I<Items>
8791 The B<MaxSetSize> option limits the number of items that the I<Sorted Sets> can
8792 hold. Negative values for I<Items> sets no limit, which is the default behavior.
8794 =item B<StoreRates> B<true>|B<false>
8796 If set to B<true> (the default), convert counter values to rates. If set to
8797 B<false> counter values are stored as is, i.e. as an increasing integer number.
8801 =head2 Plugin C<write_riemann>
8803 The I<write_riemann plugin> will send values to I<Riemann>, a powerful stream
8804 aggregation and monitoring system. The plugin sends I<Protobuf> encoded data to
8805 I<Riemann> using UDP packets.
8809 <Plugin "write_riemann">
8815 AlwaysAppendDS false
8819 Attribute "foo" "bar"
8822 The following options are understood by the I<write_riemann plugin>:
8826 =item E<lt>B<Node> I<Name>E<gt>
8828 The plugin's configuration consists of one or more B<Node> blocks. Each block
8829 is given a unique I<Name> and specifies one connection to an instance of
8830 I<Riemann>. Indise the B<Node> block, the following per-connection options are
8835 =item B<Host> I<Address>
8837 Hostname or address to connect to. Defaults to C<localhost>.
8839 =item B<Port> I<Service>
8841 Service name or port number to connect to. Defaults to C<5555>.
8843 =item B<Protocol> B<UDP>|B<TCP>|B<TLS>
8845 Specify the protocol to use when communicating with I<Riemann>. Defaults to
8848 =item B<TLSCertFile> I<Path>
8850 When using the B<TLS> protocol, path to a PEM certificate to present
8853 =item B<TLSCAFile> I<Path>
8855 When using the B<TLS> protocol, path to a PEM CA certificate to
8856 use to validate the remote hosts's identity.
8858 =item B<TLSKeyFile> I<Path>
8860 When using the B<TLS> protocol, path to a PEM private key associated
8861 with the certificate defined by B<TLSCertFile>.
8863 =item B<Batch> B<true>|B<false>
8865 If set to B<true> and B<Protocol> is set to B<TCP>,
8866 events will be batched in memory and flushed at
8867 regular intervals or when B<BatchMaxSize> is exceeded.
8869 Notifications are not batched and sent as soon as possible.
8871 When enabled, it can occur that events get processed by the Riemann server
8872 close to or after their expiration time. Tune the B<TTLFactor> and
8873 B<BatchMaxSize> settings according to the amount of values collected, if this
8878 =item B<BatchMaxSize> I<size>
8880 Maximum payload size for a riemann packet. Defaults to 8192
8882 =item B<BatchFlushTimeout> I<seconds>
8884 Maximum amount of seconds to wait in between to batch flushes.
8885 No timeout by default.
8887 =item B<StoreRates> B<true>|B<false>
8889 If set to B<true> (the default), convert counter values to rates. If set to
8890 B<false> counter values are stored as is, i.e. as an increasing integer number.
8892 This will be reflected in the C<ds_type> tag: If B<StoreRates> is enabled,
8893 converted values will have "rate" appended to the data source type, e.g.
8894 C<ds_type:derive:rate>.
8896 =item B<AlwaysAppendDS> B<false>|B<true>
8898 If set to B<true>, append the name of the I<Data Source> (DS) to the
8899 "service", i.e. the field that, together with the "host" field, uniquely
8900 identifies a metric in I<Riemann>. If set to B<false> (the default), this is
8901 only done when there is more than one DS.
8903 =item B<TTLFactor> I<Factor>
8905 I<Riemann> events have a I<Time to Live> (TTL) which specifies how long each
8906 event is considered active. I<collectd> populates this field based on the
8907 metrics interval setting. This setting controls the factor with which the
8908 interval is multiplied to set the TTL. The default value is B<2.0>. Unless you
8909 know exactly what you're doing, you should only increase this setting from its
8912 =item B<Notifications> B<false>|B<true>
8914 If set to B<true>, create riemann events for notifications. This is B<true>
8915 by default. When processing thresholds from write_riemann, it might prove
8916 useful to avoid getting notification events.
8918 =item B<CheckThresholds> B<false>|B<true>
8920 If set to B<true>, attach state to events based on thresholds defined
8921 in the B<Threshold> plugin. Defaults to B<false>.
8923 =item B<EventServicePrefix> I<String>
8925 Add the given string as a prefix to the event service name.
8926 If B<EventServicePrefix> not set or set to an empty string (""),
8927 no prefix will be used.
8931 =item B<Tag> I<String>
8933 Add the given string as an additional tag to the metric being sent to
8936 =item B<Attribute> I<String> I<String>
8938 Consider the two given strings to be the key and value of an additional
8939 attribute for each metric being sent out to I<Riemann>.
8943 =head2 Plugin C<write_sensu>
8945 The I<write_sensu plugin> will send values to I<Sensu>, a powerful stream
8946 aggregation and monitoring system. The plugin sends I<JSON> encoded data to
8947 a local I<Sensu> client using a TCP socket.
8949 At the moment, the I<write_sensu plugin> does not send over a collectd_host
8950 parameter so it is not possible to use one collectd instance as a gateway for
8951 others. Each collectd host must pair with one I<Sensu> client.
8955 <Plugin "write_sensu">
8960 AlwaysAppendDS false
8961 MetricHandler "influx"
8962 MetricHandler "default"
8963 NotificationHandler "flapjack"
8964 NotificationHandler "howling_monkey"
8968 Attribute "foo" "bar"
8971 The following options are understood by the I<write_sensu plugin>:
8975 =item E<lt>B<Node> I<Name>E<gt>
8977 The plugin's configuration consists of one or more B<Node> blocks. Each block
8978 is given a unique I<Name> and specifies one connection to an instance of
8979 I<Sensu>. Inside the B<Node> block, the following per-connection options are
8984 =item B<Host> I<Address>
8986 Hostname or address to connect to. Defaults to C<localhost>.
8988 =item B<Port> I<Service>
8990 Service name or port number to connect to. Defaults to C<3030>.
8992 =item B<StoreRates> B<true>|B<false>
8994 If set to B<true> (the default), convert counter values to rates. If set to
8995 B<false> counter values are stored as is, i.e. as an increasing integer number.
8997 This will be reflected in the C<collectd_data_source_type> tag: If
8998 B<StoreRates> is enabled, converted values will have "rate" appended to the
8999 data source type, e.g. C<collectd_data_source_type:derive:rate>.
9001 =item B<AlwaysAppendDS> B<false>|B<true>
9003 If set the B<true>, append the name of the I<Data Source> (DS) to the
9004 "service", i.e. the field that, together with the "host" field, uniquely
9005 identifies a metric in I<Sensu>. If set to B<false> (the default), this is
9006 only done when there is more than one DS.
9008 =item B<Notifications> B<false>|B<true>
9010 If set to B<true>, create I<Sensu> events for notifications. This is B<false>
9011 by default. At least one of B<Notifications> or B<Metrics> should be enabled.
9013 =item B<Metrics> B<false>|B<true>
9015 If set to B<true>, create I<Sensu> events for metrics. This is B<false>
9016 by default. At least one of B<Notifications> or B<Metrics> should be enabled.
9019 =item B<Separator> I<String>
9021 Sets the separator for I<Sensu> metrics name or checks. Defaults to "/".
9023 =item B<MetricHandler> I<String>
9025 Add a handler that will be set when metrics are sent to I<Sensu>. You can add
9026 several of them, one per line. Defaults to no handler.
9028 =item B<NotificationHandler> I<String>
9030 Add a handler that will be set when notifications are sent to I<Sensu>. You can
9031 add several of them, one per line. Defaults to no handler.
9033 =item B<EventServicePrefix> I<String>
9035 Add the given string as a prefix to the event service name.
9036 If B<EventServicePrefix> not set or set to an empty string (""),
9037 no prefix will be used.
9041 =item B<Tag> I<String>
9043 Add the given string as an additional tag to the metric being sent to
9046 =item B<Attribute> I<String> I<String>
9048 Consider the two given strings to be the key and value of an additional
9049 attribute for each metric being sent out to I<Sensu>.
9053 =head2 Plugin C<xencpu>
9055 This plugin collects metrics of hardware CPU load for machine running Xen
9056 hypervisor. Load is calculated from 'idle time' value, provided by Xen.
9057 Result is reported using the C<percent> type, for each CPU (core).
9059 This plugin doesn't have any options (yet).
9061 =head2 Plugin C<zookeeper>
9063 The I<zookeeper plugin> will collect statistics from a I<Zookeeper> server
9064 using the mntr command. It requires Zookeeper 3.4.0+ and access to the
9069 <Plugin "zookeeper">
9076 =item B<Host> I<Address>
9078 Hostname or address to connect to. Defaults to C<localhost>.
9080 =item B<Port> I<Service>
9082 Service name or port number to connect to. Defaults to C<2181>.
9086 =head1 THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION
9088 Starting with version C<4.3.0> collectd has support for B<monitoring>. By that
9089 we mean that the values are not only stored or sent somewhere, but that they
9090 are judged and, if a problem is recognized, acted upon. The only action
9091 collectd takes itself is to generate and dispatch a "notification". Plugins can
9092 register to receive notifications and perform appropriate further actions.
9094 Since systems and what you expect them to do differ a lot, you can configure
9095 B<thresholds> for your values freely. This gives you a lot of flexibility but
9096 also a lot of responsibility.
9098 Every time a value is out of range a notification is dispatched. This means
9099 that the idle percentage of your CPU needs to be less then the configured
9100 threshold only once for a notification to be generated. There's no such thing
9101 as a moving average or similar - at least not now.
9103 Also, all values that match a threshold are considered to be relevant or
9104 "interesting". As a consequence collectd will issue a notification if they are
9105 not received for B<Timeout> iterations. The B<Timeout> configuration option is
9106 explained in section L<"GLOBAL OPTIONS">. If, for example, B<Timeout> is set to
9107 "2" (the default) and some hosts sends it's CPU statistics to the server every
9108 60 seconds, a notification will be dispatched after about 120 seconds. It may
9109 take a little longer because the timeout is checked only once each B<Interval>
9112 When a value comes within range again or is received after it was missing, an
9113 "OKAY-notification" is dispatched.
9115 Here is a configuration example to get you started. Read below for more
9128 <Plugin "interface">
9145 WarningMin 100000000
9151 There are basically two types of configuration statements: The C<Host>,
9152 C<Plugin>, and C<Type> blocks select the value for which a threshold should be
9153 configured. The C<Plugin> and C<Type> blocks may be specified further using the
9154 C<Instance> option. You can combine the block by nesting the blocks, though
9155 they must be nested in the above order, i.E<nbsp>e. C<Host> may contain either
9156 C<Plugin> and C<Type> blocks, C<Plugin> may only contain C<Type> blocks and
9157 C<Type> may not contain other blocks. If multiple blocks apply to the same
9158 value the most specific block is used.
9160 The other statements specify the threshold to configure. They B<must> be
9161 included in a C<Type> block. Currently the following statements are recognized:
9165 =item B<FailureMax> I<Value>
9167 =item B<WarningMax> I<Value>
9169 Sets the upper bound of acceptable values. If unset defaults to positive
9170 infinity. If a value is greater than B<FailureMax> a B<FAILURE> notification
9171 will be created. If the value is greater than B<WarningMax> but less than (or
9172 equal to) B<FailureMax> a B<WARNING> notification will be created.
9174 =item B<FailureMin> I<Value>
9176 =item B<WarningMin> I<Value>
9178 Sets the lower bound of acceptable values. If unset defaults to negative
9179 infinity. If a value is less than B<FailureMin> a B<FAILURE> notification will
9180 be created. If the value is less than B<WarningMin> but greater than (or equal
9181 to) B<FailureMin> a B<WARNING> notification will be created.
9183 =item B<DataSource> I<DSName>
9185 Some data sets have more than one "data source". Interesting examples are the
9186 C<if_octets> data set, which has received (C<rx>) and sent (C<tx>) bytes and
9187 the C<disk_ops> data set, which holds C<read> and C<write> operations. The
9188 system load data set, C<load>, even has three data sources: C<shortterm>,
9189 C<midterm>, and C<longterm>.
9191 Normally, all data sources are checked against a configured threshold. If this
9192 is undesirable, or if you want to specify different limits for each data
9193 source, you can use the B<DataSource> option to have a threshold apply only to
9196 =item B<Invert> B<true>|B<false>
9198 If set to B<true> the range of acceptable values is inverted, i.E<nbsp>e.
9199 values between B<FailureMin> and B<FailureMax> (B<WarningMin> and
9200 B<WarningMax>) are not okay. Defaults to B<false>.
9202 =item B<Persist> B<true>|B<false>
9204 Sets how often notifications are generated. If set to B<true> one notification
9205 will be generated for each value that is out of the acceptable range. If set to
9206 B<false> (the default) then a notification is only generated if a value is out
9207 of range but the previous value was okay.
9209 This applies to missing values, too: If set to B<true> a notification about a
9210 missing value is generated once every B<Interval> seconds. If set to B<false>
9211 only one such notification is generated until the value appears again.
9213 =item B<Percentage> B<true>|B<false>
9215 If set to B<true>, the minimum and maximum values given are interpreted as
9216 percentage value, relative to the other data sources. This is helpful for
9217 example for the "df" type, where you may want to issue a warning when less than
9218 5E<nbsp>% of the total space is available. Defaults to B<false>.
9220 =item B<Hits> I<Number>
9222 Delay creating the notification until the threshold has been passed I<Number>
9223 times. When a notification has been generated, or when a subsequent value is
9224 inside the threshold, the counter is reset. If, for example, a value is
9225 collected once every 10E<nbsp>seconds and B<Hits> is set to 3, a notification
9226 will be dispatched at most once every 30E<nbsp>seconds.
9228 This is useful when short bursts are not a problem. If, for example, 100% CPU
9229 usage for up to a minute is normal (and data is collected every
9230 10E<nbsp>seconds), you could set B<Hits> to B<6> to account for this.
9232 =item B<Hysteresis> I<Number>
9234 When set to non-zero, a hysteresis value is applied when checking minimum and
9235 maximum bounds. This is useful for values that increase slowly and fluctuate a
9236 bit while doing so. When these values come close to the threshold, they may
9237 "flap", i.e. switch between failure / warning case and okay case repeatedly.
9239 If, for example, the threshold is configures as
9244 then a I<Warning> notification is created when the value exceeds I<101> and the
9245 corresponding I<Okay> notification is only created once the value falls below
9246 I<99>, thus avoiding the "flapping".
9250 =head1 FILTER CONFIGURATION
9252 Starting with collectd 4.6 there is a powerful filtering infrastructure
9253 implemented in the daemon. The concept has mostly been copied from
9254 I<ip_tables>, the packet filter infrastructure for Linux. We'll use a similar
9255 terminology, so that users that are familiar with iptables feel right at home.
9259 The following are the terms used in the remainder of the filter configuration
9260 documentation. For an ASCII-art schema of the mechanism, see
9261 L<"General structure"> below.
9267 A I<match> is a criteria to select specific values. Examples are, of course, the
9268 name of the value or it's current value.
9270 Matches are implemented in plugins which you have to load prior to using the
9271 match. The name of such plugins starts with the "match_" prefix.
9275 A I<target> is some action that is to be performed with data. Such actions
9276 could, for example, be to change part of the value's identifier or to ignore
9277 the value completely.
9279 Some of these targets are built into the daemon, see L<"Built-in targets">
9280 below. Other targets are implemented in plugins which you have to load prior to
9281 using the target. The name of such plugins starts with the "target_" prefix.
9285 The combination of any number of matches and at least one target is called a
9286 I<rule>. The target actions will be performed for all values for which B<all>
9287 matches apply. If the rule does not have any matches associated with it, the
9288 target action will be performed for all values.
9292 A I<chain> is a list of rules and possibly default targets. The rules are tried
9293 in order and if one matches, the associated target will be called. If a value
9294 is handled by a rule, it depends on the target whether or not any subsequent
9295 rules are considered or if traversal of the chain is aborted, see
9296 L<"Flow control"> below. After all rules have been checked, the default targets
9301 =head2 General structure
9303 The following shows the resulting structure:
9310 +---------+ +---------+ +---------+ +---------+
9311 ! Rule !->! Match !->! Match !->! Target !
9312 +---------+ +---------+ +---------+ +---------+
9315 +---------+ +---------+ +---------+
9316 ! Rule !->! Target !->! Target !
9317 +---------+ +---------+ +---------+
9324 +---------+ +---------+ +---------+
9325 ! Rule !->! Match !->! Target !
9326 +---------+ +---------+ +---------+
9336 There are four ways to control which way a value takes through the filter
9343 The built-in B<jump> target can be used to "call" another chain, i.E<nbsp>e.
9344 process the value with another chain. When the called chain finishes, usually
9345 the next target or rule after the jump is executed.
9349 The stop condition, signaled for example by the built-in target B<stop>, causes
9350 all processing of the value to be stopped immediately.
9354 Causes processing in the current chain to be aborted, but processing of the
9355 value generally will continue. This means that if the chain was called via
9356 B<Jump>, the next target or rule after the jump will be executed. If the chain
9357 was not called by another chain, control will be returned to the daemon and it
9358 may pass the value to another chain.
9362 Most targets will signal the B<continue> condition, meaning that processing
9363 should continue normally. There is no special built-in target for this
9370 The configuration reflects this structure directly:
9372 PostCacheChain "PostCache"
9374 <Rule "ignore_mysql_show">
9377 Type "^mysql_command$"
9378 TypeInstance "^show_"
9388 The above configuration example will ignore all values where the plugin field
9389 is "mysql", the type is "mysql_command" and the type instance begins with
9390 "show_". All other values will be sent to the C<rrdtool> write plugin via the
9391 default target of the chain. Since this chain is run after the value has been
9392 added to the cache, the MySQL C<show_*> command statistics will be available
9393 via the C<unixsock> plugin.
9395 =head2 List of configuration options
9399 =item B<PreCacheChain> I<ChainName>
9401 =item B<PostCacheChain> I<ChainName>
9403 Configure the name of the "pre-cache chain" and the "post-cache chain". The
9404 argument is the name of a I<chain> that should be executed before and/or after
9405 the values have been added to the cache.
9407 To understand the implications, it's important you know what is going on inside
9408 I<collectd>. The following diagram shows how values are passed from the
9409 read-plugins to the write-plugins:
9415 + - - - - V - - - - +
9416 : +---------------+ :
9419 : +-------+-------+ :
9422 : +-------+-------+ : +---------------+
9423 : ! Cache !--->! Value Cache !
9424 : ! insert ! : +---+---+-------+
9425 : +-------+-------+ : ! !
9426 : ! ,------------' !
9428 : +-------+---+---+ : +-------+-------+
9429 : ! Post-Cache +--->! Write-Plugins !
9430 : ! Chain ! : +---------------+
9431 : +---------------+ :
9434 + - - - - - - - - - +
9436 After the values are passed from the "read" plugins to the dispatch functions,
9437 the pre-cache chain is run first. The values are added to the internal cache
9438 afterwards. The post-cache chain is run after the values have been added to the
9439 cache. So why is it such a huge deal if chains are run before or after the
9440 values have been added to this cache?
9442 Targets that change the identifier of a value list should be executed before
9443 the values are added to the cache, so that the name in the cache matches the
9444 name that is used in the "write" plugins. The C<unixsock> plugin, too, uses
9445 this cache to receive a list of all available values. If you change the
9446 identifier after the value list has been added to the cache, this may easily
9447 lead to confusion, but it's not forbidden of course.
9449 The cache is also used to convert counter values to rates. These rates are, for
9450 example, used by the C<value> match (see below). If you use the rate stored in
9451 the cache B<before> the new value is added, you will use the old, B<previous>
9452 rate. Write plugins may use this rate, too, see the C<csv> plugin, for example.
9453 The C<unixsock> plugin uses these rates too, to implement the C<GETVAL>
9456 Last but not last, the B<stop> target makes a difference: If the pre-cache
9457 chain returns the stop condition, the value will not be added to the cache and
9458 the post-cache chain will not be run.
9460 =item B<Chain> I<Name>
9462 Adds a new chain with a certain name. This name can be used to refer to a
9463 specific chain, for example to jump to it.
9465 Within the B<Chain> block, there can be B<Rule> blocks and B<Target> blocks.
9467 =item B<Rule> [I<Name>]
9469 Adds a new rule to the current chain. The name of the rule is optional and
9470 currently has no meaning for the daemon.
9472 Within the B<Rule> block, there may be any number of B<Match> blocks and there
9473 must be at least one B<Target> block.
9475 =item B<Match> I<Name>
9477 Adds a match to a B<Rule> block. The name specifies what kind of match should
9478 be performed. Available matches depend on the plugins that have been loaded.
9480 The arguments inside the B<Match> block are passed to the plugin implementing
9481 the match, so which arguments are valid here depends on the plugin being used.
9482 If you do not need any to pass any arguments to a match, you can use the
9487 Which is equivalent to:
9492 =item B<Target> I<Name>
9494 Add a target to a rule or a default target to a chain. The name specifies what
9495 kind of target is to be added. Which targets are available depends on the
9496 plugins being loaded.
9498 The arguments inside the B<Target> block are passed to the plugin implementing
9499 the target, so which arguments are valid here depends on the plugin being used.
9500 If you do not need any to pass any arguments to a target, you can use the
9505 This is the same as writing:
9512 =head2 Built-in targets
9514 The following targets are built into the core daemon and therefore need no
9515 plugins to be loaded:
9521 Signals the "return" condition, see the L<"Flow control"> section above. This
9522 causes the current chain to stop processing the value and returns control to
9523 the calling chain. The calling chain will continue processing targets and rules
9524 just after the B<jump> target (see below). This is very similar to the
9525 B<RETURN> target of iptables, see L<iptables(8)>.
9527 This target does not have any options.
9535 Signals the "stop" condition, see the L<"Flow control"> section above. This
9536 causes processing of the value to be aborted immediately. This is similar to
9537 the B<DROP> target of iptables, see L<iptables(8)>.
9539 This target does not have any options.
9547 Sends the value to "write" plugins.
9553 =item B<Plugin> I<Name>
9555 Name of the write plugin to which the data should be sent. This option may be
9556 given multiple times to send the data to more than one write plugin. If the
9557 plugin supports multiple instances, the plugin's instance(s) must also be
9562 If no plugin is explicitly specified, the values will be sent to all available
9565 Single-instance plugin example:
9571 Multi-instance plugin example:
9573 <Plugin "write_graphite">
9583 Plugin "write_graphite/foo"
9588 Starts processing the rules of another chain, see L<"Flow control"> above. If
9589 the end of that chain is reached, or a stop condition is encountered,
9590 processing will continue right after the B<jump> target, i.E<nbsp>e. with the
9591 next target or the next rule. This is similar to the B<-j> command line option
9592 of iptables, see L<iptables(8)>.
9598 =item B<Chain> I<Name>
9600 Jumps to the chain I<Name>. This argument is required and may appear only once.
9612 =head2 Available matches
9618 Matches a value using regular expressions.
9624 =item B<Host> I<Regex>
9626 =item B<Plugin> I<Regex>
9628 =item B<PluginInstance> I<Regex>
9630 =item B<Type> I<Regex>
9632 =item B<TypeInstance> I<Regex>
9634 =item B<MetaData> I<String> I<Regex>
9636 Match values where the given regular expressions match the various fields of
9637 the identifier of a value. If multiple regular expressions are given, B<all>
9638 regexen must match for a value to match.
9640 =item B<Invert> B<false>|B<true>
9642 When set to B<true>, the result of the match is inverted, i.e. all value lists
9643 where all regular expressions apply are not matched, all other value lists are
9644 matched. Defaults to B<false>.
9651 Host "customer[0-9]+"
9657 Matches values that have a time which differs from the time on the server.
9659 This match is mainly intended for servers that receive values over the
9660 C<network> plugin and write them to disk using the C<rrdtool> plugin. RRDtool
9661 is very sensitive to the timestamp used when updating the RRD files. In
9662 particular, the time must be ever increasing. If a misbehaving client sends one
9663 packet with a timestamp far in the future, all further packets with a correct
9664 time will be ignored because of that one packet. What's worse, such corrupted
9665 RRD files are hard to fix.
9667 This match lets one match all values B<outside> a specified time range
9668 (relative to the server's time), so you can use the B<stop> target (see below)
9669 to ignore the value, for example.
9675 =item B<Future> I<Seconds>
9677 Matches all values that are I<ahead> of the server's time by I<Seconds> or more
9678 seconds. Set to zero for no limit. Either B<Future> or B<Past> must be
9681 =item B<Past> I<Seconds>
9683 Matches all values that are I<behind> of the server's time by I<Seconds> or
9684 more seconds. Set to zero for no limit. Either B<Future> or B<Past> must be
9696 This example matches all values that are five minutes or more ahead of the
9697 server or one hour (or more) lagging behind.
9701 Matches the actual value of data sources against given minimumE<nbsp>/ maximum
9702 values. If a data-set consists of more than one data-source, all data-sources
9703 must match the specified ranges for a positive match.
9709 =item B<Min> I<Value>
9711 Sets the smallest value which still results in a match. If unset, behaves like
9714 =item B<Max> I<Value>
9716 Sets the largest value which still results in a match. If unset, behaves like
9719 =item B<Invert> B<true>|B<false>
9721 Inverts the selection. If the B<Min> and B<Max> settings result in a match,
9722 no-match is returned and vice versa. Please note that the B<Invert> setting
9723 only effects how B<Min> and B<Max> are applied to a specific value. Especially
9724 the B<DataSource> and B<Satisfy> settings (see below) are not inverted.
9726 =item B<DataSource> I<DSName> [I<DSName> ...]
9728 Select one or more of the data sources. If no data source is configured, all
9729 data sources will be checked. If the type handled by the match does not have a
9730 data source of the specified name(s), this will always result in no match
9731 (independent of the B<Invert> setting).
9733 =item B<Satisfy> B<Any>|B<All>
9735 Specifies how checking with several data sources is performed. If set to
9736 B<Any>, the match succeeds if one of the data sources is in the configured
9737 range. If set to B<All> the match only succeeds if all data sources are within
9738 the configured range. Default is B<All>.
9740 Usually B<All> is used for positive matches, B<Any> is used for negative
9741 matches. This means that with B<All> you usually check that all values are in a
9742 "good" range, while with B<Any> you check if any value is within a "bad" range
9743 (or outside the "good" range).
9747 Either B<Min> or B<Max>, but not both, may be unset.
9751 # Match all values smaller than or equal to 100. Matches only if all data
9752 # sources are below 100.
9758 # Match if the value of any data source is outside the range of 0 - 100.
9766 =item B<empty_counter>
9768 Matches all values with one or more data sources of type B<COUNTER> and where
9769 all counter values are zero. These counters usually I<never> increased since
9770 they started existing (and are therefore uninteresting), or got reset recently
9771 or overflowed and you had really, I<really> bad luck.
9773 Please keep in mind that ignoring such counters can result in confusing
9774 behavior: Counters which hardly ever increase will be zero for long periods of
9775 time. If the counter is reset for some reason (machine or service restarted,
9776 usually), the graph will be empty (NAN) for a long time. People may not
9781 Calculates a hash value of the host name and matches values according to that
9782 hash value. This makes it possible to divide all hosts into groups and match
9783 only values that are in a specific group. The intended use is in load
9784 balancing, where you want to handle only part of all data and leave the rest
9787 The hashing function used tries to distribute the hosts evenly. First, it
9788 calculates a 32E<nbsp>bit hash value using the characters of the hostname:
9791 for (i = 0; host[i] != 0; i++)
9792 hash_value = (hash_value * 251) + host[i];
9794 The constant 251 is a prime number which is supposed to make this hash value
9795 more random. The code then checks the group for this host according to the
9796 I<Total> and I<Match> arguments:
9798 if ((hash_value % Total) == Match)
9803 Please note that when you set I<Total> to two (i.E<nbsp>e. you have only two
9804 groups), then the least significant bit of the hash value will be the XOR of
9805 all least significant bits in the host name. One consequence is that when you
9806 have two hosts, "server0.example.com" and "server1.example.com", where the host
9807 name differs in one digit only and the digits differ by one, those hosts will
9808 never end up in the same group.
9814 =item B<Match> I<Match> I<Total>
9816 Divide the data into I<Total> groups and match all hosts in group I<Match> as
9817 described above. The groups are numbered from zero, i.E<nbsp>e. I<Match> must
9818 be smaller than I<Total>. I<Total> must be at least one, although only values
9819 greater than one really do make any sense.
9821 You can repeat this option to match multiple groups, for example:
9826 The above config will divide the data into seven groups and match groups three
9827 and five. One use would be to keep every value on two hosts so that if one
9828 fails the missing data can later be reconstructed from the second host.
9834 # Operate on the pre-cache chain, so that ignored values are not even in the
9839 # Divide all received hosts in seven groups and accept all hosts in
9843 # If matched: Return and continue.
9846 # If not matched: Return and stop.
9852 =head2 Available targets
9856 =item B<notification>
9858 Creates and dispatches a notification.
9864 =item B<Message> I<String>
9866 This required option sets the message of the notification. The following
9867 placeholders will be replaced by an appropriate value:
9875 =item B<%{plugin_instance}>
9879 =item B<%{type_instance}>
9881 These placeholders are replaced by the identifier field of the same name.
9883 =item B<%{ds:>I<name>B<}>
9885 These placeholders are replaced by a (hopefully) human readable representation
9886 of the current rate of this data source. If you changed the instance name
9887 (using the B<set> or B<replace> targets, see below), it may not be possible to
9888 convert counter values to rates.
9892 Please note that these placeholders are B<case sensitive>!
9894 =item B<Severity> B<"FAILURE">|B<"WARNING">|B<"OKAY">
9896 Sets the severity of the message. If omitted, the severity B<"WARNING"> is
9903 <Target "notification">
9904 Message "Oops, the %{type_instance} temperature is currently %{ds:value}!"
9910 Replaces parts of the identifier using regular expressions.
9916 =item B<Host> I<Regex> I<Replacement>
9918 =item B<Plugin> I<Regex> I<Replacement>
9920 =item B<PluginInstance> I<Regex> I<Replacement>
9922 =item B<TypeInstance> I<Regex> I<Replacement>
9924 =item B<MetaData> I<String> I<Regex> I<Replacement>
9926 =item B<DeleteMetaData> I<String> I<Regex>
9928 Match the appropriate field with the given regular expression I<Regex>. If the
9929 regular expression matches, that part that matches is replaced with
9930 I<Replacement>. If multiple places of the input buffer match a given regular
9931 expression, only the first occurrence will be replaced.
9933 You can specify each option multiple times to use multiple regular expressions
9941 # Replace "example.net" with "example.com"
9942 Host "\\<example.net\\>" "example.com"
9944 # Strip "www." from hostnames
9950 Sets part of the identifier of a value to a given string.
9956 =item B<Host> I<String>
9958 =item B<Plugin> I<String>
9960 =item B<PluginInstance> I<String>
9962 =item B<TypeInstance> I<String>
9964 =item B<MetaData> I<String> I<String>
9966 Set the appropriate field to the given string. The strings for plugin instance,
9967 type instance, and meta data may be empty, the strings for host and plugin may
9968 not be empty. It's currently not possible to set the type of a value this way.
9970 The following placeholders will be replaced by an appropriate value:
9978 =item B<%{plugin_instance}>
9982 =item B<%{type_instance}>
9984 These placeholders are replaced by the identifier field of the same name.
9986 =item B<%{meta:>I<name>B<}>
9988 These placeholders are replaced by the meta data value with the given name.
9992 Please note that these placeholders are B<case sensitive>!
9994 =item B<DeleteMetaData> I<String>
9996 Delete the named meta data field.
10003 PluginInstance "coretemp"
10004 TypeInstance "core3"
10009 =head2 Backwards compatibility
10011 If you use collectd with an old configuration, i.E<nbsp>e. one without a
10012 B<Chain> block, it will behave as it used to. This is equivalent to the
10013 following configuration:
10015 <Chain "PostCache">
10019 If you specify a B<PostCacheChain>, the B<write> target will not be added
10020 anywhere and you will have to make sure that it is called where appropriate. We
10021 suggest to add the above snippet as default target to your "PostCache" chain.
10025 Ignore all values, where the hostname does not contain a dot, i.E<nbsp>e. can't
10041 L<collectd-exec(5)>,
10042 L<collectd-perl(5)>,
10043 L<collectd-unixsock(5)>,
10056 Florian Forster E<lt>octo@collectd.orgE<gt>